User Manual Microwave Links

v e r s i o n 2.8.3

AT283_UMM_E2

Atoll User Manual

2

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Contact Information
Forsk (Head Office) 7 rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac France

    

www.forsk.com sales@forsk.com helpdesk@forsk.com +33 (0) 562 74 72 10 +33 (0) 562 74 72 25 +33 (0) 562 74 72 11 sales_us@forsk.com support_us@forsk.com +1 312 674 4846 +1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655) +1 312 674 4847 www.forsk.com.cn enquiries@forsk.com.cn +86 20 8553 8938 +86 20 8553 8285

Web Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Web Information and enquiries Telephone Fax

Forsk (USA Office) 200 South Wacker Drive Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60606 USA

   

Forsk (China Office) Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building, No.66 Jianzhong Road, Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone, Guangzhou, 510665, People’s Republic of China

   

Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual Release AT283_UMM_E2 © Copyright 1997 - 2010 by Forsk The software described in this document is provided under a license agreement and may only be used or copied under the terms and conditions of the license agreement. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form without prior authorisation from Forsk. The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective registering parties.

About the Atoll User Documentation
The Atoll user documentation is a guide and reference for users working with Atoll. Atoll is easy to use and offers a clear, self-explanatory user interface. The user documentation helps the user make effective and efficient use of all the features that Atoll offers. The user documentation aims to familiarise the user with the working environment of Atoll and enable him to use all of Atoll’s features and functions. The Atoll user documentation is technology-specific. For each Atoll radio technology, the Atoll user manual contains instructions and information specific to that technology as well as chapters describing the Atoll working environment and the tools available.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

3

Atoll User Manual

4

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

.....4.................................5 1.....................................................................1 1................................... 29 Using Zones in the Map Window.................................. 27 Centring the Map Window on an Object................................................. 28 Displaying the Map Legend ........... 13 Working with Document Windows ............................................................1..............................................4........................ and Points ..............3 1..................... 33 Using a Geographic Export Zone ............................. 17 Using the Object Context Menu .................................................6 1..................................... 16 Working with Layers Using the Explorer .......................................3......... 21 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects ..............3 1.........................4 1..5 1................4 1................................... 15 Navigating in the Explorer Window ................................. 26 Zooming In on a Specific Area...1......................................... 26 Changing the Map Scale ..................3...1........ 36 Editing a Point.....4.........1..................................................................3........2.............................................3 1..................................8 1.....................3....................................2 1....................3........4...........................................4.........2.....4..........1 1. 29 Using a Filtering Zone..............2 1........ 26 Zooming In and Out ...................................................................... 30 Using a Focus Zone....................................3 1.................................................3......................................................................2................... 33 Editing Polygons...............................................................2.......1............1 1..........................4.................................2 1............3 1......... Lines...........................3 1.................................. 1 1........4...4...............................................................................................2 1....................1 1.................................................................................................................................................... 39 Copying a Map to Another Application ...............................................................4 1... 16 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer............................2.........................................4. Lines.................2....................................................................... 34 Creating Polygons.............................. 18 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links .4 1..................................... 19 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse ............................................ 14 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window..........................................................................................................3...............................................2.....1...........4...............3...........3..........................8.............................................................................4........................................................................................................................................................................2..................... 28 Measuring Distances on the Map ................................ 38 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions................................. 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 1..........1......Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents..... 29 Using a Computation Zone ............................................4.................................................... 28 Displaying Rulers Around the Map ....10....................................................7 1....5 1.....4................ 27 Choosing a Scale...........................................10.6 1..... Lines.......................8......................................2 1......................4.... 21 Defining the Display Properties of Objects ......................................................4...........2 5 The Working Environment .... and Points.....................................2 1................2 1........................................................................................................................................................4............... 15 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs.............. 38 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format ... 27 Moving the Map in the Document Window........................................................... 13 The Atoll Work Area ..8..............................4.................4.............. 37 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results...................6 1........................3 1.........................................................................................4......................2 1...................................4.......4..............................................................5 1........ 34 Adding a Vector Layer .... 31 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools.1 1....................... 25 Working with Maps..................4.................1 1.........................................................................................3 1............3 1................4............... 20 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse .........................1..... 16 Working with Objects ..........9. 37 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format ...........4.........................9.............................................9.....10 1..............12 © Forsk 2010 5 . 19 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse ..........................2............9.................................3..........................................................................8.....................4.......................................4.....3....................................................................................4....... 19 Moving a Site Using the Mouse ...........................3..............................................................................................................4 1..............3...............................................................3......................1............. 17 Renaming an Object .................... 35 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines ............................... 31 Using a Printing Zone ......1 1......6 1.................... 27 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels... 18 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map ................................... 36 Editing Contours................................................................... and Points Using the Context Menu ............................ 39 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image .................. 35 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar..............4....8............................................ 14 The Explorer Window ............................................................9....................................1 1................................. 27 Using the Panoramic Window .........1 1..........2 1...............2...9............................... 19 Moving a Site to a Higher Location................................10...1 1.......9 1.........2 1....... 17 Deleting an Object ...... 17 Displaying the Properties of an Object ..............................................11 1..............................3.4 1...........................4..4 1......1 1.....3..................4.................1 1... 20 Display Properties of Objects ...2 1............................8........................................3 1.......................

..5...44 Copying and Pasting in Tables ..................................................70 Deleting a Folder Configuration.................................................................6..............................56 Configuring the Group By Submenu ......2 1..............................11 Working with Data Tables .......2 1....................................................2............. and Filtering Data..53 Defining the Print Layout .........3 1........7...4 1..........................2 1.............................................47 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents ...................42 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields .................................................................................5 1...................6..................2 1...............................................7....................................................60 Advanced Sorting ....................................52 Printing Recommendations ................7..........5..7......5 1.....................................5................................................................4 1............6....1 1...7....73 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 1..........4 1.7...........................54 Previewing Your Printing....................58 Advanced Grouping..6.......................................................7.............................8....2 1......................................................72 Searching for Objects on the Map.6..........8 1............7.......................7....................................................................................8...1.................................................68 Editing a Site List.........3 1....67 Importing a User Configuration ....................3 1....................5..................................................................................................................................1 1................1 1..................1 1....2 1........................................................................................5 1......................5......................................63 Restoring All Records................................................................................8...............10 1.3 1....7..........7...........3 1..................................................5........................72 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name .................................................6 1............................................................................................1.....................1 1.................6 1.........................................7..........................3....................................................69 Filtering on a Site List...............70 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration .................7........................4 1.5....2...........................1 1...61 Filtering Data................................................................................................................................................................8 1.........................72 Undoing and Redoing ...........................................................................................................64 Advanced Filtering: Examples ......1 1......71 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone.7............1 1..................................6.................1..................................................1 1...............................................................................................68 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window ..................................5..70 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration ......................................41 Opening a Data Table ....................................6 1......1 1.................2 1.....................................56 Grouping................................2.....................................5........3...2.............4 1............7.........8..................56 Grouping Data Objects..........................................69 Creating a Folder Configuration ..........44 Defining the Table Format......7.....................5...............................49 Exporting Tables to Text Files..........................3...............50 Exporting Tables to XML Files ........................... Sorting.......................7.........................................7............................4.....................................................................................................................................7.....7.....71 Creating and Comparing Subfolders............7...................................5.........40 1.6.....5......................Atoll User Manual 1....................................5 1...........7....................................................................................5 1..............................................2.............................................................................................................................. Deleting........7...............................69 Folder Configurations...................8..3 6 ...................................................................6 1...............................72 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property ......................8 1....7.......................................................................................6 1................ and Editing Data Table Fields..............66 Exporting a User Configuration ....................62 Advanced Data Filtering ............................................56 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property ...............................59 Sorting Data ......................64 User Configurations ............6....................................68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone ...........................................................................................................................5....................................................................................................6.....................................5........................67 Creating a Site List ............................................................................................7 1.........................................3 1........7.7.42 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table .............58 Examples of Grouping ........................................................8.....43 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table ..........70 Importing a Folder Configuration.......................................................7 1........................................................68 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window .....7................................................................55 Printing a Docking Window ..................52 Printing Data Tables and Reports ......................................................2................73 Searching for a Point on the Map .........................................................................4.....................................................7............................................7.7....52 Printing a Map .............................52 Printing in Atoll .....5.6...................................................................5......................................2..........1.............................60 Sorting Data in Tables.............................................7.................................................43 Editing the Contents of a Table..................51 Importing Tables from XML Files ....................1.....3 1........2 1.........................................................................................................................................7....5..........13 Map Window Pointers ...................72 Refreshing Maps and Folders .................................47 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells .............2 1.................3...........................4 1.2 1.........................................................1 1.......3.................5.............................................................................6....................................................3 1.....6..............2 1.............49 Importing Tables from Text Files...............................53 Defining the Printing Zone ......................41 Adding.........................................................2......................5.3......4.............................................................2 1......................................5...4 1..................42 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table...57 Grouping Microwave Links by Site ..................................................................................5..................................................................................................................................................2 1......................................5 1.......................3 1........1 1........................7 1.................3 1..............................................................................................9 1.....................3...........7................................62 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection............2 1.......6.....................................5...1 1...................1 1...............................................................67 Site Lists................71 Tips and Tricks .............................70 Exporting a Folder Configuration...........47 Copying and Pasting a Table Element ...........6......6..............................................

...........................................................................3.......................................2.................................................................1 2..............................................1 3.................................................1 2... 106 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer ..............2 3..............................................3......... 99 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type .. 104 Defining Clutter Class Properties ........10...... 110 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas .....................3 Contours........8............................... 106 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab.........................................2 3.........................1 3.. 91 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects ...................................................................................................3................................. 79 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project ................................. 105 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes ........... 104 Adding a Clutter Class.................................. 81 Working in a Multi-User Environment .....2 3............1 3.........................2......1........ 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations .....................................................2...................................... 107 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images .........................................................................1 3.................. and Points ........................................................................................7..............................................12 3...............................3..........3 3................................5 3...................... 106 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer.............................6 1.............5......................... 91 2..............3 2..2... 107 Importing Several Scanned Images ................ 97 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File ..................2..2 3.............. 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ........5..................... 107 Scanned Images ................. 90 Configuring Automatic Backup ............. 103 3................................1.................................................3......2........1 2..........4 3..2 2...10.............9 3.1........2..........................3.... 95 Geographic Data Types .................................................................................... 98 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data..............................8................................................................................1 © Forsk 2010 Geographic Data Sets ............3........... Lines..............1 3..3......................................................... 74 Using Shortcuts in Atoll .................................................................2 3...............................3 3.............7......................1 3.......9.......... 102 Embedding Geographic Data ............................................................................ 74 Using Icons from the Toolbar ........................3........................................................................................................2................................................... 112 3.................................... 106 3....................................................................................................... 84 Working With a Document on a Database......... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ............10 3..............................................2.................................................................. 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data...............................................................................6 3. 109 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data ...11 3....... 111 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area ...................... 83 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database ...............7 Using the Status Bar to Get Information................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7 .............................................................................................9........2 3............................................. 87 Making a Backup of Your Document ............ 105 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class ...............12........................10.......................................................................................5...............................................................2 3.....3...............................................1 3.....................3....................................................2 2...................4 3.....................................................................8...........................................10....................... 111 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area . 109 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics...........2 2....................5..5 1..5 3......................................... 112 Exporting a Geo Data Set .................... 79 Creating an Atoll Document ...........2...........................................Table of Contents 1. 75 2 2.................................................................................................... 103 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes ............................ 108 Geoclimatic Maps .......................................................2........... 83 The Atoll Multi-User Environment ........ 96 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File .....2. 99 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database ............................3..............3............3 2............................2............... 105 Clutter Heights .............................................. 102 Digital Terrain Models ......................................................... 79 Templates Available .................................................................................................8..............................................................8 3..........................................................3 2............ 73 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer... 96 Importing Geo Data Files ................8..........4 3............ 86 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database ..2 3........................3 3.......... 100 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File ... 102 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File................................. 85 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database .....................7 Managing Geographic Data ......................................................... 101 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders...............2 2...................................................................................6 3............................................................................5 Clutter Classes..................................................5 Starting an Atoll Project ..2 2.. 111 Displaying Information About Geo Data ......2...................................1 3............. 95 Supported Geographic Data Formats .........2 3....2....................................................................................2..............................................................................4 2...............3 3....................................................................................................... 108 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties ............................ 80 Defining a New Atoll Document .............................................8....10...............1 3.............1 2......................................................4 3 3................. 90 Recovering a Backup ...7 3............................2..................7.........................................5.................................................................................................................................................1 2..................................................................................................2............................................................4 1.....................................

...13............................................................................................14.........................................156 6...................13.....................................................................13...............................151 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P....................................2 5............................................................................................................1 4...........................................5 4.................138 Defining Compatibility Manually ......2....................................1 4............................................1 4...........1 4.............................452 Model.............................113 Editing Clutter Class Maps....................4 3..........................................4.........................................................1 3..................................................................................14..................2 4...............1 4............................116 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File...132 Digital Hierarchies ............................................................................................................1 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands .........123 Defining Antennas....................................2 4..........................1 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ...............................1............4 4..116 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File ......................................146 Short-Haul Frequency Band...3....................................5...............................................................................115 Saving Geographic Data ......................................................................................................................................148 6 6.............3.............3 3..1...........................................2 6................................1 4................2 6..............................Atoll User Manual 3.........3................................1 3.........................2 Importing a Geo Data Set ................146 5....................3.....2..................1 3.................145 Microwave Frequency Bands ...........3.................123 Importing Microwave Antennas....1 3.............2..................................151 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects .155 Defining Availability Objectives ....2.156 Defining Calculation Parameters ............................................................................2 Editing Geographic Data ....................................................................................1 6.....................................................................................2 5....................4 3.................2 4..........139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility .........................................................................................................13.................................2 3.........................154 Defining Performance Objectives......146 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands ...........................2 4................4......................................................................................................................14.................137 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables..................5..............1.............123 Creating an Antenna ....................114 Editing Clutter Polygons ..............................14..............13 3...2.5........1..................151 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model .....................139 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility....................................................................136 Microwave Waveguides and Cables .........................................156 Global Parameters ....................3 5....................139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility ...............154 Microwave Link Classes.......................................................................................................................................1.............14........................................................................................118 Exporting an Embedded File...................................................................................1.......5.............................1......3 4............3...................1..................................154 Defining Quality Objectives ......2.................3 6...............................................................................................128 Importing Microwave Equipment..............................................3 4................................2...........14 3.....140 4....................................................................1 4.........................................................................................2....1...................2 4.....2 Managing Calculations in Atoll .145 Long-Haul Frequency Band .................138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table ..................................................................5 4 4...................147 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band ..................2 3....1 6........125 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns .....117 Updating the Source File.........2.............14................................................115 Editing Geoclimatic Maps..........2 5 5...............................................................125 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns ................114 Creating a Clutter Polygon .....................................................14.........138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table .....................................................................127 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll............114 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons ..................................................................................................132 Advanced Configuration...............119 3.....................................................................1....................................................12..............................................1 6...........................3..............3....................................13........................2 4...3 4..132 Interference Reduction Factor ....1 4...4 Antennas and Equipment........2............................................153 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives ................................................................................................................115 Deleting Clutter Polygons.....118 Creating a New File from a Larger File ..2 4........................................123 Defining the List of Manufacturers .............126 Microwave Equipment.................................................................3...........2 6......................................138 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility ..13...................3 4.......137 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable ................3........................................................................................................1.............................................3 3......2 3................................................2...................................................145 Medium-Haul Frequency Band ..............113 3.......117 Combining Several Files into One File.......................1............................................133 Theoretical Graphs......5..................................3 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands ...............................1 5.......................1....................1 5....................2.......................................................5................1 6.................116 Saving Modifications to an External File .................3............................................

...... 194 Printing a Microwave Link Profile.....5...................... 185 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link ..... 175 Creating or Modifying a Site ...................................................5........2.......5..3...............2..........................................................................................................................3..3 7...................2........................................2.........................4 7...2.....................1..................1 7................. 194 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options.... 188 Defining Port Parameters ................................................3......3 7............... 176 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites ............. 174 Site Description.... 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis . 190 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template.........................................................................................3.........9 7................................ 176 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site .........5......................................... 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link ....................3... 180 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site ................................2 7.4.............. 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ......................... 193 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile ...3. 193 Studying Microwave Link Clearance.................................... 192 Checking Data Consistency ...1 7......... 173 Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites ....2.......................3 7......................3 7.......................................................................1 6.........................................................2 7......5..3.........................4 7..................3..............1 7.........2..................................3..2................1 7.4..................................................... 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7...................................................................................1...5...............................................3...............................1 7..1 7......................2 7....2 7.......................2 7.......................................2.........................................3................................................3.......................................................................3............5 7..................... 181 Search Tools for New Sites .............................2..................4....................... 206 Setting a Microwave Link as Active .................................. 202 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability ....................................3.......3 7.......................5..4.......... 184 Creating Microwave Links .................2 6.............1 7........5 7..............2 7............. 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links ........................................5................................................................................2.............................................................1 7................................. 206 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report ......3....................1..........................2....... 210 Displaying Reflection.................. 200 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights...............................................................................................................6 7........2..2 7.............2..2 7............................ 189 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template........................ 185 Definition of a Microwave Link..............8 7.... 191 Deleting a Microwave Link Template...2 7........................3 7.................1 7...................2........ 197 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights..................4.........................2 7.................................... 192 Analysing the Path Profile .................................. 200 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse .....1........... 201 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater ...................5.................................................... 176 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites.......................................................4...........2................................................................... 179 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites .........................................................2 7. 204 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters ...4 7........1 7...................2................................................................ 191 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template ................... 204 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget.................................................................... 205 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display....................................3 Microwave Link Project Management ...................................................3 Link Parameters ......5.........................................1...2 7............................7 7.......4....................5.............................5..........4 7.........................1 7...........................................................4................................................1...............................6 7.............1 7.................................................................................3 7.... 200 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater..................5 7............5..2.......................................3........3...................2...........................1..................................................................................... 207 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets.2 6.3..6 7.2 7................ 192 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ......2 7.... 195 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile.............4..3 7......................................2....................................... 193 Displaying the Path Profile .....1............ 200 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights.......................................................1...................3 7....5.....................7 7...................................... 203 Analysing a Single Microwave Link ..............................................................5................................................................................................... 190 Managing Microwave Link Templates ............................................................6..................................3......... 206 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report............. 206 Analysing Microwave Links .........4................1........4 7..............................................................................................................2...2.....................5....... 210 Studying Reflection ........................... 174 Creating Sites ...................................5 7.. 165 7 7.......................................... 163 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links ....................... 175 Site Survey Tools ............................. 202 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse ........................................ 207 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity.....................................3 7..........................4....................................................4 7.........................................2 © Forsk 2010 9 .......................................... 195 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values .............................................................................................. 203 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins.............................................................................................. 211 Analysing Reflections ...1..1 7..............................4........................ 173 Designing a Microwave Link Network ........................................2... 194 Zooming In on the Profile..........5 7....................................................1 7.....................................2........4...........................1.........................1..........3 7............................................. 191 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links ......................................1 7............3...................... 208 Creating Multi-hops...................3..................4..........Table of Contents 6.5......................................................6............2....4....................................... 201 Description of a Passive Repeater .......4...................................... 191 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map ...........1..........

.................................................................214 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters ..........1..............................217 Creating a Report on Site Parities..........1........................................9 7......................1.............................8....................230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub......9.......................6......229 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally...8..................2 7...............6........1 7.................................214 Solutions Against Reflections.........................................................3 7.......................................................................................................................2 7..............3 7..........3 7.....218 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser .........................1.1.221 Interference Reduction Factor..........224 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links ...............9..............................................9 7.............1.........220 Analysing Interference .........................................7......2 7..........1 7....................7.................................9.................Atoll User Manual 7......................................................................4...............................216 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities ...........229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse ....................1....7...........................................................218 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search..........9.........................1........................................................................221 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant.............8..........................4.....230 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link...................................................1 7.......227 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link .............2............................9.................................................................10 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report..................2 7............................2 7..........................217 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse ........3 7........8....................................................................225 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links ...............................8................226 Displaying Interference on the Map ..............8..............217 Checking Site Parities on the Map ...................1 7...............................................................................................1 7...........7............9.............7 7........231 Index .....2.................6...9..............212 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report ...............................................................................................................9...............................................................1 7..9....................5 7...............................................................1.........................230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse.......................................................................................................2 7........................6 7....................4 7........1......6................219 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products.....7.............1 7. 233 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ..............5 7........1...222 Using IRF in Interference Calculations...............226 Managing Interference Calculation Validity...............................8...6 7.........................1 7.............................8....................................7.......3 7..................7...........................................8....................................8 7............7 7...........................................221 Defining IRF Graphs Manually .....2 7.........................224 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link ..4 7...........230 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link......................................9.............................1......5 7....................9.............................................................4 7..........229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ...................226 Advanced Configuration........215 Planning Microwave Link Channels ...................................1........225 Defining the Content of the Interference Report............8 7.................1.........................................228 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active....................227 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties ....................................................8......................2..................227 Point-to-Multipoint Links....

Chapter 1 The Working Environment .

.

You can.. a point on the map. The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables. shown in Figure 1. You can also export the current display definition. calculations.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1 The Working Environment The Atoll working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to create and define your microwave-planning project in a single application. Atoll offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. and clutter classes. context menus. The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. or you can link your project to external files. Using the Explorer window. with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window. to use it in other documents. or a vector. The map is the working area for your document and Atoll provides many features for working with the map. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a document arranged in folders. Atoll offers the standard Windows Print functionality. and support for standard Windows shortcuts. for example. with the ability to have several document windows open at the same time. You can sort and filter the data in a table. define various studies or configure the parameters or display of data objects. You can save the entire project as a single file. allowing you to manage large amounts of data. as well as geographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). You can also use the table feature to enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table. for cutting and pasting.1 on page 14. Atoll also provides other tools. Sorting.1 on page 14). some of which can be docked into the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1. such as a search tool to locate either a site. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • "The Atoll Work Area" on page 13 "The Explorer Window" on page 15 "Working with Objects" on page 17 "Printing in Atoll" on page 52 "Working with Maps" on page 26 "Working with Data Tables" on page 41 "Grouping. or configuration. 1. or change how the data is displayed. Atoll uses standard Windows interface elements.1 The Atoll Work Area The Atoll work area. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 13 . or only certain objects. arranged in folders. etc. for example. parts of it. and Filtering Data" on page 56 "Tips and Tricks" on page 72. Atoll also allows you to undo recent changes to your document. consists of the main window where the map window and data tables and reports are displayed and the Explorer window. The tools open in separate windows. support for drag-and-drop. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 15. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. You can change the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they are displayed. you can manage all objects in the Atoll document: sites.

1. maximise. To cascade document windows: • Select Window > Cascade. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. display the content of the active document.1: Atoll user interface 1. such as the Explorer window. 1. they will display the content of the active document. but part of the working environment and. in order to display all of them at the same time. You can leave a window in its docking area.1. Depending on the position of the docking window. Other windows and tools. To close a window: • Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window Only document windows are part of an individual Atoll document. You can resize. in order to display the title bar of each document window. you can tile document windows. when you switch to a different document. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.1 Working with Document Windows When you have one Atoll document open. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.Atoll User Manual Toolbar Document window (map) Workspace Explorer window (docked) Panoramic window (floating) Point Analysis window (docked) Figure 1. You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimising the window. Depending on the position of the window. select the name of the window. To tile document windows: • Select Window > Tile. They are not part of the individual Atoll document. and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application. To maximise a window in its docking area: • Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. or you can have it float over the working environment. As well. allowing you to maximise the amount of area for document windows or other windows. To minimise a window in its docking area: • Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window. You can change how these windows and tools are displayed. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or cascade them. You can also choose to remove them from their position and float them over the Atoll working environment. To display a window: • On the View menu. you can have several document windows open at the same time.

1. WiMAX 802. the following are described: • • • • "Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 15 "Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 16 "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16 "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. 1. press CTRL as you drag the docking window. most folder contents can also be accessed in a table. For information on working with tables. In this section. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. GSM/GPRS Parameters. To dock a window: • To return the window to its previous docked location. they remain the same no matter which document you open. or LTE Parameters UMTS Simulations. CDMA2000) • The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules. As well. Or • Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-clicking. CDMA2000 Simulations .16e Parameters. or LTE Simulations Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Hexagonal design Microwave links CW Measurements and Drive test data The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data. WiMAX 802. etc. Depending on the modules installed with Atoll. The number of folders depends on the number and types of geographical data types (vector data. Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document. To prevent the window from docking as you move it. arranged in folders. double-click the docking window title bar.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To float a window: • Double-click the docking window title bar.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs The Explorer window has three tabs: • The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. It contains: A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models: Longley-Rice Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata Standard Propagation Model ITU 526-5 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 15 . WiMAX 802.16d Parameters. CDMA2000 Parameters. Note: You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it.16d Simulations. with changes affecting all items in the folder.16e simulations. UMTS HSPA.) you import or create: Clutter classes Clutter heights Digital Terrain Model Population data Any other geo data map Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA. WiMAX 802.2 The Explorer Window The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. or you can access and edit items individually. The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the working environment. You can modify items at the folder level. the Data tab has the following folders: • Sites Antennas Transmitters Predictions UMTS Parameters.2. scanned images. allowing you to easily manage large amounts of information.

so that the results of one prediction are more clearly displayed. Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand ( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.2. 1. Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name. To expand a folder to display its contents: • Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of its name. To hide an object on the map: 1. a horizontal black line indicates where the object will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1. 2. each tab has objects and folders containing objects. The check box appears cleared ( object is no longer visible on the map. it will still be taken into consideration during calculations.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer You can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map.Atoll User Manual ITU 1546 WLL Microwave Propagation Model Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) The AFP models available in your Atoll installation. Any additional module created using the API. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. it indicates that the folder contains both visible and hidden objects. ) and the 1. you could hide all predictions but one.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window The Explorer window has three tabs. To move a layer up or down: 1.2).2. To move from one tab to another: • Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. 1. Note: Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window. Click and drag the object to its new position. the map is made of objects arranged in layers. As you drag the object.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer In Atoll.2. 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ). This allows you to hide one type of object so that another type of object is more plainly visible. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and visible (see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16) and on the transparency of these layers (see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). Note: You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the folder name. A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. 2. For example.

2. Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18. a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter. To delete an object: 1. The context menu appears.3 Working with Objects In Atoll.ini file. see "Printing Recommendations" on page 53.3. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name. 1. For more information. objects such as sites are named with default prefixes. The selected object is deleted. see the Administrator Manual.1. The context menu appears.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects.3. Individual objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default prefix. To rename an object: 1. 2. Select Delete from the context menu.2 Deleting an Object You can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map. You can change the default prefix for sites by editing the atoll.1 Using the Object Context Menu In Atoll. Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 17. the following context menu commands common to all objects types are explained: • • • Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 17. you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers. 1. Select Rename from the context menu. Atoll enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object and selecting the operation from the context menu.1 Renaming an Object You can change the name of an object in Atoll. an object’s context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that are common to most objects. Most objects in Atoll belong to an object type. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 17 . 3.3. the following are explained: • • • "Using the Object Context Menu" on page 17 "Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map" on page 18 "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. For example.1. Note: In Atoll. In this section.2: Moving a layer Note: Before you print a map. 1. 1. In this section. For more information. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map.

When opening the an item’s Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table.3. The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section. 18 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . When a site is selected. the site (and its name) is surrounded by a black frame ( ). the following are explained: • • • • • "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19"Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20.3. For propagation model properties. both ends of its icon have a green point ( ). Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and microwave links directly from the map. it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab.2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map In a complex microwave or -planning project. For example: • • • If transmitters are grouped by site. Atoll prompts you to confirm these changes before switching to the next Properties dialogue. If transmitters are grouped by a flag. If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy.) in the same folder or subfolder in the Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( • • • • : jump to the first item in the list : jump to the previous item in the list : jump to the next item in the list : jump to the last item in the list ) in the lower-left corner of each Properties dialogue: If you have made any changes to the properties of an item. 2. When a transmitter is selected. You can use this feature. To open the Properties dialogue of a data object: 1. clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19). Tip: When you are selecting data objects on the map. 1. For repeater properties. The Properties dialogue appears. you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters). to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening the Properties dialogue.Atoll User Manual 1. Switching Between Property Dialogues You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (antennas. you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity and the same flag. When there is more than one microwave link with with the same azimuth. although it might be visible in the map window. The context menu appears. In this section. sites. for example.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object You can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue. it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been selected. you can switch only within this group. You can also change the position of a site by dragging it. or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. The browse buttons are not available: • • • • When creating a new item.1. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. etc.

Atoll can find a higher location within a specified radius from the current location of the site. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth. The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar.3. using the mouse.2. A context menu appears with a list of thelinks with the same azimuth (seeFigure 1. To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse: 1. To select one of several microwave link with the same azimuth: 1. in terms of reception and transmission. you can set the azimuth of a link’s antenna by modifying it on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. - When you select a microwave link. 2.3). both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined ( ). the exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In Atoll.2. It is defined in degrees.2. 3. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). As you drag the site. 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. 3. or by using the mouse.3: Selecting one microwave link 2. To have Atoll move a site to a higher location: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 19 . In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue. Atoll enables you to select a specificmicrowave link. 1.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location If you want to improve the location of a site. click the link extremity whose azimuth you want to modify.1 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links If there is more than one microwave link with the same azimuth. In the map window. 1. Figure 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. Atoll locks the position of a site. Atoll moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius. 3. By default. enter the radius of the area in which Atoll should search and click OK. with 0° indicating north. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. Atoll asks you to confirm that you want to move the site. click thelinks. Click and drag the site to the desired position. An arc with an arrow appears under the pointer.3. The context menu appears. Select Move to a Higher Location. When the position of a site is locked. Right-click the site in the map window. Tip: While this method allows you to place a site quickly.3.2. 2. 4.3. you can adjust the location more precisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. Release the site where you would like to place it.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. 2. On the map. or you can modify it on the map. Click Yes to confirm. Select thelink from the context menu. To move a site using the mouse: 1.

by pressing CTRL+Z. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the antenna from the site position. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). by pressing CTRL+Z. you can change the position of the antenna relative to the site either by adjusting the Dx and Dy parameters or by entering the coordinates of the antenna position on the General Tab of the Microwave link Property dialogue. 3. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the antenna’s position relative to the site. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse By default. Click the green rectangle and drag it to the other site on the map. To select another site for the link extremity on the map: 1. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth. 2. click the link extremity you want to move. antennas are occasionally not located directly on the site. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity. A cross appears under the pointer.3. 5. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. 5. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected link extremity to the desired position. but a short distance away. On the map. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. The antenna’s azimuth relative to the link direction is modified on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. However. The current coordinates (x and y) of the antenna are displayed in the far right of the status bar. using the mouse. The site for the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue and the link is renamed. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. To move a microwave link extremity using the mouse: 1. or by clicking to undo the changes made. 3. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can also modify the position of the antenna on the map.Atoll User Manual 5. by pressing CTRL+Z. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. in the toolbar) 1. On the map. In Atoll. click the link extremity you want to move. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. indicating it is selected. antennas are placed on the site. 2.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse In Atoll. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. 4. you can change the link extremity and place it on another site using the mouse. 4.2. Release the mouse when the frame appears around the site. The position of the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue.3. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. A cross appears under the pointer.2.

3. 2.5: The Display tab for an individual site To define the display properties of an object type: 1. the Display tab will only show the options applicable to an individual object (see Figure 1.5). The Display tab is similar for all object types whose appearance can be configured.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1.3 Display Properties of Objects In Atoll. Select the Display tab. the display options are explained. belong to an object type. The Properties dialogue appears. Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window. In this section. Depending on the object type. 1.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects Figure 1. most objects. Set the display parameters.4: The Display tab for Sites When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object. 3. Figure 1. followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working on your Atoll document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 25). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 21 . the following options are available: "Defining the Display Type" on page 22 "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23 "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24 "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24 4. How an individual object appears on the map depends on the settings on the Display tab of the object type’s Properties dialogue. Select Properties from the context menu. such as sites.4).3. The context menu appears.3. Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavailable on the Display tab of its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1.

v. ii. To access the Actions menu: 1. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. To change the display type: 1. To modify the appearance of a symbol. Defining the Display Type Depending on the object selected. Delete: Atoll removes selected value from the table. The value intervals will be determined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. discrete values. Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals. Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. vi. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. Define the ranges directly in the table below. and enter a value in the Interval box. signal strength. a new site. To modify the appearance of a symbol. you must click the Refresh button ( ) for Atoll to assign a colour to newly created object according to the set display type. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. objects of different types. 2. Modify the symbol as desired. you could use this display type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type. see the Administrator Manual. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. For more information. v. or the altitude of sites. For example. To modify the appearance of the symbol. sites. for example. Select the display type from the Display Type list: Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. click the symbol in the table below. Modify the symbol as desired. 2. Enter the upper and lower limits of the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively. iii. for example. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. For information on the commands available. Properties: Atoll opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style. or automatic. Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. iv. Click the Actions button. iv. i. i. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table before the threshold selected in the table. This display type can be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic.Atoll User Manual 5. For information on the commands available. This display type can be used. you can choose from the following display types: unique. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. Click OK. ii. Modify the symbol as desired. ii.7 on page 24. Notes: • • When you create a new map object. value intervals. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. Shading: Atoll opens the Shading dialogue. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands: Select all: Atoll selects all the values in the table. iii. By defining a unique symbol for an object type. see Figure 1. You can define the default symbol used for sites and how it is displayed by editing an option in the atoll. to distinguish population density. For an example. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. for example. or to distinguish inactive from active sites. click the symbol in the table below. Using the Actions Button The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. iii. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . click the symbol in the table. are immediately identifiable. Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field.ini file. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table after the threshold selected in the table. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type. i. you select Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour.

such as predictions. To change the order of the fields. To define an object visibility range: 1. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type. To define a label for an object type: 1. 2. 4. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. An object is visible only if the scale. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.Chapter 1: The Working Environment When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box. such as sites. you can display information about each object in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. so that you can share them with other users or use them in other documents. Defining the Object Type Label For most object types. Click OK to close the Field Selection dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Select Export if you want to export the display settings of the current object to a configuration file. To change the transparency: 1. and some object types. 2. b. Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list.6: Defining a label 3. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. 2. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. Select the fields which you want to display in the label: a. They do not affect which objects are considered during calculations. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types You can change the transparency of some objects. This can be used to. such as clutter classes. as displayed on the Map toolbar. is within this range. c. for example. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to make it less transparent. and for printing and previewing printing. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box. Figure 1. from top to bottom. Configuration: Select Import if you want to import an existing display configuration. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Label box. prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at a certain scale. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. 3.6). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 23 . Defining the Visibility Scale You can define a visibility range for object types. you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and an End Colour. including from fields that you add.

including from fields that you add. This option has the advantage of not filling the map window with text. Figure 1. The defined display will appear on the legend. 3. 2. and Point to Multipoint folders. Adding an Object Type to the Legend You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) in your Atoll document’s legend. 1. on the Display tab of a signal level prediction. you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. To display the Legend window: • Select View > Legend. To select a field to be displayed in the tool tip for the object type. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click Note: to remove it. the tool tip displays the total numbers of elements present in the Sites. To activate the tool tip function: • Click the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. you can also display object information in the form of a label that is displayed with the object.6). see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. and their subfolders. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object. b. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. In the Explorer window.7.7: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend With value intervals. This option has the advantage of keep object-related information permanently visible. Multi-Hops. For most object types. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Tip Text box. To define tip text for an object type: 1. In Figure 1. Select the fields which you want to display in the tool tip: a. 2. Check the Add to legend box. Links.Atoll User Manual Note: For most object types. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. you must activate the tool tip function before they appear. For more information on tool tips. For information on displaying or hiding objects. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. Once you have defined the tool tips. you can display information about each object in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window. If there is no information entered in this column. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. the intervals defined are: • • • Signal level >= -65 red -65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 intervals) Signal level < -105 not shown in the coverage. the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead. The Legend window appears. For more information on tool tips. such as sites and microwave links. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window. you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend. Defining the Object Type Tip Text For most object types.

Shading .3. 6.8. for each pixel on the map. the transmitter display type is "Automatic." Atoll colours each pixel on the map according to the colour of the transmitter that is best received on that pixel.3. Figure 1. the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values.Server Coverage Studies When doing a best server prediction.8: Value interval display type Figure 1. For more information about setting options in the atoll. This way. You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the results easier to read or more relevant to your needs. 1.9: Automatic display type To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type: 1. these value intervals appear as differences of shading.11. you can change the range of data displayed. the interval between each break. Atoll calculates. If the selected display type for transmitters is "Automatic. The difference in colour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each pixel. Click the Refresh button ( ) to update the display of the study results.ini file. The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study. the study results are also immediately visible.Signal Level Study" on page 25. On the map. The Properties dialogue appears. see the Administrator Manual. In Figure 1. The context menu appears.9. you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received on each pixel. Automatic Display Type . Select Properties from the context menu.10 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm. However.ini file. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type.Chapter 1: The Working Environment You can also display the comments defined in the properties of a coverage prediction in the Legend window by setting an option in the atoll. 5. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 25 . which server is best received. if you are more interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm. In this example. In Figure 1. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window. Figure 1. or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible.Signal Level Study Atoll displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals. For example. 4. you can change the shading to display only those values. Click OK. The result is visible in Figure 1.Server Coverage Studies" on page 25 "Shading ." Because Atoll ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects In this section are the following examples of how display properties of objects can be used: • • "Automatic Display Type . 2. 3. Select the Display tab." with the site name as the chosen value.

1. Change the value of the First Break to "-80".11: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm 1.1 Zooming In and Out Atoll offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. or by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue. 2.4. To zoom in on the map: 1. 1. 4. Select the Display tab. you do so based on the position of the cursor on the map. When you zoom in or out on the map. Note: You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL++. and Points" on page 34 "Saving a Map as a Graphic Image" on page 39 "Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 40. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105. Lines. 2. 3. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study.4. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading. Select Properties from the context menu. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes. or by choosing a scale.1 Changing the Map Scale You can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out. Atoll also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23). by selecting Zoom In from the View menu.10: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed: Figure 1. The context menu appears.4 Working with Maps Atoll has the following functions to help you work with maps: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Changing the Map Scale" on page 26 "Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 27 "Using the Panoramic Window" on page 27 "Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 28 "Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 28 "Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 28 "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29 "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 "Editing Polygons. The Shading dialogue appears. 7.1. 1. by zooming in on a specific area of the map." 6.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Click the map where you want to zoom in. "Map Window Pointers" on page 40. The Properties dialogue appears. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q). 5.

4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels Atoll saves the last five zoom levels. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. ) to return to the latest zoom 1.. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on. You can use the Panoramic window to: • • • Zoom in on a specific area of the map Resize the displayed map area Move around the map. Note: You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+–. Drag to the opposite corner. If the scale value you want is not in the list: 1. ) on the Map toolbar. To move between zoom levels: • • Click the Previous Zoom button ( ) to return to a zoom level you have already used (or press ALT + ←). To resize the displayed map area: 1. 1. When you release the mouse button. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. Select the scale from the list. Drag the border to its new position. To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. 1. Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i. A dark rectangle indicates what part of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window. 1. Drag to the opposite corner.1. Atoll zooms the map to the entered scale. Click the Move Map Window button ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL + D). ) on the Map toolbar. helping you situate the displayed area in relation to the entire map.3 Choosing a Scale To choose a scale: 1. Press ENTER. allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas.4. Once you have returned to a previous zoom level. or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 27 . 2.4. by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu. When you release the mouse button.1.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1.3 Using the Panoramic Window The Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data. Click the arrow next to the scale box ( 2. the dark rectangle). 3. 2. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).4.4. Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction. Enter the desired scale. Click in the scale box ( 2. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. click the Next Zoom button ( level (or press ALT + →). Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+W). 2. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out. 1.e.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window You can move the map in the document window using the mouse.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To zoom out on the map: 1. To move the map in the document window: 1.4. 3.1. 2. 2.

12: Measurement data in the status bar 1.Atoll User Manual To move around the map: 1. a transmitter. for example. 3. on the map. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i. 2. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept. In the Options dialogue. As you move the pointer away from the first point. To measure a distance on the map between two points: 1. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar. 1. To the map window on a selected object: 1. or on any zone in the Zones folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar.e. 1. a site. 2. Tip: If you want to quickly find an object. Click the first point on the map once. the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu. the azimuth of each segment between two points. Total distance between Azimuth between secondfirst and last point last and last point Distance between secondlast and last point Figure 1.12): The distance between the two points The azimuth between the two points. When you reach the last point on the line. 2. such as a site.. where you will have to change direction on the line. To display rulers: 1. 2.4.4. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. 2. 3. To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points: 1. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point. Atoll will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure).6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map You can display rulers around the map in the document window.12): The total distance between the first point and the last point The distance between the second-last point and the last point The azimuth between the last two points.5 Measuring Distances on the Map You can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. The Distance Measurement tool also gives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points.4. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the dark rectangle). you can select it in the Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command. As you move the pointer away from the first point. Drag the rectangle to its new position. and the total distance. 4. Click the first point on the map once. click the Coordinates tab. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object You can centre the map on any selected object. Select Tools > Options. Place the pointer over the second point on the map. You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measure distance along a line with several points. You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.

Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3. By limiting the number of sites. etc. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. b..7 Displaying the Map Legend You can display a map legend. • • • • 1.4. Atoll provides you with a set of tools known as zones. link budget. 1.).4. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Click OK. For example. 5. Select Draw from the context menu.8. 4. Geographic Export Zone: The geographic export zone is used to define part of the map to be exported as a bitmap.8. In other words. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible.1 Creating a Filtering Zone To create a filtering zone: 1. In other words. Zones can be used to define areas of the map for the following purposes: • Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. etc. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 29 . Draw the filtering zone: a. or points. 1. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29 "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30 "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31 "Using a Printing Zone" on page 33 "Using a Geographic Export Zone" on page 33. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which microwave links are to be taken into consideration in calculations (i.1 Using a Filtering Zone The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. etc. Important: Zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. Under Display rulers.. c. The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it. 1.4. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data objects on the map clearer. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. if you have drawn a zone. 2. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.8 Using Zones in the Map Window On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. interference analysis. Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. In this section. which can be created and modified in the same way as contours.4. The zones are a type of polygons. 4. For information on adding object types to the legend. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected.1. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder. To display the legend: • Select View > Legend. select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window. if you have drawn a zone. 3. if you have filtered the sites using a filtering zone. Focus Zone: With the focus zone.e. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24. the sites outside the filtering zone will not be taken into consideration in coverage predictions. even if you have cleared the filtering zone’s visibility check box. lines. you can select the areas of coverage predictions or other calculations on which you want to generate reports and results.

for example.2. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( ). a polygon describing an administrative area. 2. You can also create a filtering zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the filtering zone. For more information on the polygon editing tools.1 Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. you can import it and use it as a computation zone. 1. In other words. Atoll calculates all the microwave links that are active. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. to indicate that the folder contents have been filtered. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Filtering Zone from the context menu.8. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document.4. by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. 5.Atoll User Manual The filtering zone is delimited by a blue line. and intersects the computation zone. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. c. you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. 4. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . b. that are selected by the current filter parameters). For more information on the polygon editing tools. 3. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. filtered (i. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. On the Data tab of the Explorer window. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Computation Zone from the context menu.e. When you make a link budget or you study interference.2 Using a Computation Zone The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. for example. Draw the computation zone: a. if you have drawn a computation zone. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations.4. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. If there is no computation zone defined. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the computation zone. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. Note: You can export the filtering zone as a polygon. a polygon describing an administrative area. • Once you have created a filtering zone. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Select Draw from the context menu. • Once you have created a computation zone. When working with a large network.8.. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. 1. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The context menu appears.

Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can save the computation zone. However. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Exporting the computation zone: You can export the computation zone by rightclicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 4. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67.4. The context menu appears.8. you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filters the displayed results. Right-click the Focus Zone folder. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. 2. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to define an area for reports. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. In other words. Select Draw from the context menu. 1.3. and filtering zones. in the following ways: Saving the computation zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration. Atoll will use the computation zone. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Note: You can save the focus zone . you can define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made.8. you can delete it from the map. for example. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. The polygons of a focus zone must not intersect or overlap each other. you can import it and use it as a focus zone. interference studies. c. etc. Atoll takes the focus zone taken into account whether or not they are visible. Exporting the focus zone: You can export the focus zone by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. You can also create a focus zone in one of the following ways: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the focus zone. When you no longer need the zone. if you have drawn a focus zone. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. - 1. 5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. if no focus zone is defined. 3. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. a polygon describing an administrative area. by combining several polygons.It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. focus zone. Note: A focus zone can consist of more than one polygon.4. You can edit these zones by editing the points that define them. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.8. in the following ways: Saving the focus zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration. Draw the focus: a. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 31 . Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone. instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. A focus zone is delimited by a green line. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the computation zone. b. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone.3 Using a Focus Zone Using the focus zone . You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.4. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Focus Zone from the context menu. The computation zone defines the sites and microwave links calculated in link budget. by using a focus zone for the report.1 Drawing a Focus Zone To define a focus zone: 1. or by deleting parts of the polygons that make up these zones. • 1.

iii. The point is deleted. To put the polygon zone in editing mode: 1. To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. ii. you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. the following are explained: • • "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32 "Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 33. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. Select Edit from the context menu. 2. The pointer changes ( ). Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. and focus zone polygons can contain holes. The filtering. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. Adding a point to the polygon zone: i. The pointer changes ( ). The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections: • • • "Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 33.4. Click the contour to edit. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone. In this section. Deleting a point from a polygon zone: i. Drag the point to its new position. Select the polygon zone. The pointer changes ( ). 2. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. : To delete part of the selected polygon zone: 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Position the pointer over the point you want to delete.Atoll User Manual The computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. you must first put it in editing mode. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone To edit a point of a polygon zone: 1. Atoll merges them. : To combine several polygon zones: In the Vector Edition toolbar. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. computation. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar In Atoll. If polygon zones overlap. Draw more polygon zones if desired. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit.1 Editing Polygon Zones You can edit polygon zones in several ways. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. 4. Double-click to close the polygon zone. ii. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. ii. Before you can edit a polygon zone. 3. 2. Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point. A point is added to the polygon zone border at the position of the pointer. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. 1. iv.4. You can now edit it by: Moving a point: i.8. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. v. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. ii. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. click the Combine button ( ).

line. select Delete Zone. or point from the map. In the Vector Edition toolbar. Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export the map as a raster image. ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. line. Double-click to close the area. : To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. you can access certain commands using the context menu.Chapter 1: The Working Environment i. Double-click to close the polygon.4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 33 . iii. iv. iv.4. iv. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. 2. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour. After you have defined a geographic export zone. i. click the Intersection button ( ). 3. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. 1. To remove a polygon zone: 1. Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove. Click to place the contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.4. Move: i.5 1. Double-click to close the polygon. you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects.8. iii.4. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. ii. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. From the context menu. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one. line.2 Removing a Polygon Zone When you no longer need a polygon zone. 2. 1. or point on the map. Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. click the Split button ( ). Atoll creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two polygons and deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap. Tip: You can also delete it by right-clicking its border on the map and selecting Delete from the context menu. line. see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53. click the Delete button ( ). To edit a polygon zone using the context menu: 1. Using a Geographic Export Zone If you want to export part of the map as a bitmap. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one. you can define a geographic export zone. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following: Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone. iii. : To split the selected polygon into several polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. ii. i. For information on using the printing zone. or point. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now displayed. Click the polygon zone you want to edit. Move the contour. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu When you are editing polygon zones. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. 4. The Properties dialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area.6 Using a Printing Zone The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. iii.8.8. Atoll separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected polygon and creates a new polygon. ii. or point.

9.9 Editing Polygons. For example. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. described in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29. or point. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. Polygons. Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the polygons. the zones such as the computation and focus. 4. Lines. You can also create a geographic export zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the geogaphic export zone. are specific types of polygons. Fit to Map Window: You can create a geographic export zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.Atoll User Manual To define a geographic export zone: 1. In this section. line. and points. and Points Atoll uses different types of polygons. Draw the geographic export zone: a. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31.4. lines. you can import it and use it as a geographic export zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 37. lines or points to geographical map information in a project by first creating a vector layer. • Once you have created a geographic export zone. 3. 1. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a geographic export zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Geographic Export Zone from the context menu. by path loss. The context menu appears. including the computation and focuspolygons can contain holes.1 Adding a Vector Layer You can add vector objects such as polygons. Lines. lines. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. Select Draw from the context menu. called contours. the different ways of editing polygons. by combining several polygons. be used to add additional information to geographic data. or by deleting parts of the polygons. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. Lines. by adding a vector layer to them and afterwards adding polygons. 1. 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and Points" on page 35 "Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines" on page 35 "Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar" on page 36 "Editing a Point" on page 36 "Editing Contours. for example. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line . lines and points. by signal level. When you no longer need the polygon. lines. by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. by a transmitter attribute. You can move or delete the points that define polygons. you can delete it from the map. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. Important: The geographic export zone can only export in raster format. You can also modify certain geographic data maps. You can edit polygons by editing the points that define them. and points. b. geoclimatic maps. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. Another type of polygon. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. can along with lines and points. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. When you release the mouse. 2. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. For information on modifying certain geographic data maps by adding a vector layer.4. lines. Note: You can export the geographic export zone as a polygon. and points in the map window. 5. and points are explained: • • • • • • "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34 "Creating Polygons. For more information on the polygon editing tools. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counterclockwise order. or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example.

2. For more information.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines You can edit the shape of polygons and lines on the vector layer. To edit the shape of polygons and lines: 1. right-click the vector layer folder.4. b. Atoll creates a folder called "Vectors" on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 35 . Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. Select Edit from the context menu. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. New Line: a. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. or point to a vector layer: 1. Lines.2 Creating Polygons. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. Select the contour or line. The tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are available. as explained in "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34. Right-click the vector layer on the Geo tab. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. c. 4. Click each time you change angles on the line. New Rectangle: a. lines. © Forsk 2010 Position the pointer over the point you want to move. Select Edit from the context menu. 2. 1. Tip: You can also make the vector tools available by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. 3. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. For information on adding vector objects such as contours. you can add polygons. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. 1. Double-click to close the contour. Double-click to end the line. and Points Once you have created a vector layer. see "Creating Polygons. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. You can now edit by: Moving a point: i. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar: New Polygon: a. If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible. Note: If the polygon or rectangle is on the vector layer of a geoclimatic map. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. To add a polygon. The context menu appears. c. The pointer changes ( Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited ).Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add a vector layer to the Geo tab: • Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) ) on the Vector Edition toolbar. c.9. and points to it. b. and Points" on page 35. you must define the value the polygon or rectangle represents and map the vector layer. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. Lines. select View > Vector Edition Toolbar. and points to the vector layer. The context menu appears. For information on renaming objects. line. New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point. you can ensure that you select the correct folder.. By renaming each vectors folder. Click once on the map where you want to begin the line. 3.4.9. b. lines.

click the Delete button ( ). v.Atoll User Manual ii. click the Combine button ( ). Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.5 Editing a Point To edit a point: 1. Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected contour and creates a new contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. : To delete part of the selected contour: In the Vector Edition toolbar. The pointer changes ( ). 1. Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Drag the point to its new position.9. you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. 2. click the Split button ( ). On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . : To split the selected contour into several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. The point is deleted. Click the contour to edit. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. A point is added to the contour border or line at the position of the pointer. i. ii. Double-click to close the contour. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Atoll merges them. The context menu appears. iv. i. iii. ii. Adding a point to a contour or a line: i. iv. Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point. iv. Deleting a point from a contour or a line: i. i. The pointer changes ( ). Select Edit from the context menu.9. iv. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. 2.4.4. Select Edit from the context menu. Draw more contours if desired. ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. : To combine several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Double-click to close the contour. To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one. Double-click to close the area. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. right-click the vector layer folder. ii. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. 1. click the Intersection button ( ). Double-click to close the contour. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one. ii. If contours overlap. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. iii. iii. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar In Atoll. The context menu appears. ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iii. 3. : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. right-click the vector layer folder.

10 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results In Atoll. Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour. ArcView© grid. only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. or point are displayed in the context menu. you can export the entire coverage prediction. line. line. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. 2. You can export coverage predictions separately or you can export several coverage predictions at the same time. line. Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour. Only the commands relevant to the selected contour. by a transmitter attribute. Deleting a point: i. In this case. Move: i. or by total losses). or point.4. or point from the map. ii. In this section. or AGD formats. The file exported can then be imported as a vector or raster object in Atoll or in another application. line. Click the point you want to delete. or point. Move the contour. Drag the point to its new position. or point.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. To edit a vector object using the context menu: 1. and any Properties of the contour. The pointer changes ( ). JPEG 2000. Note: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 37 . line. ii. and points. the Surface of the object. you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. Click to place the contour. Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line. you can not export a coverage prediction in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. ii. iii. or you can export a defined area of the coverage prediction. however. Click the vector object you want to edit. or point on the map. by path loss. line. When you export more than one coverage prediction. In vector formats. line. You can now edit by: Moving: i. by signal level.4. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point.9. or point. The point is deleted. or point. lines. 1. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. you can access certain commands using the context menu. Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour. Select the point. All coverage types can be exported.6 Editing Contours. In raster formats. line. The pointer changes ( ). the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. TIF. and Points Using the Context Menu When you are editing contours. Atoll suggests the formats that can be used for all the coverage predictions to be exported. you can export in ArcView©. 3. or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. the following are explained: • • • "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format" on page 38 "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format" on page 38 "Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions" on page 39. you can export in BMP. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer. Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following: Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. Click the point you want to move. Lines. MapInfo©. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer.

Under Region. or 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. When you release the mouse. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. the geographic export zone. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. 2. 4. The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone. Draw the geographic export zone by clicking the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone and dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. c. 6. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage.2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format To export a coverage prediction in raster format 1. Select Draw from the context menu. 7. The Save As dialogue appears. b. If desired. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported.10. define the geographic export zone: a. If desired. The context menu appears. enter the File name and select the raster format from the Save as type list. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. select the area to export: The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by the study. d. The Save As dialogue appears. move the Smoothing slider. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. 2. change the Resolution of the exported coverage. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. b. a. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. b. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction. To export the geographic export zone. 1. or enter the percentage in the text box. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu.Atoll User Manual 1. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. 5. c. under Coordinate Systems.4. The default resolution is the resolution of the coverage prediction results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue). enter the File name and select the vector format from the Save as type list. f. or part of the coverage prediction.4. You can export the entire coverage prediction. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported. 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. For information on displaying objects in the map window. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. 3. 4. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. For information on displaying objects in the map window. change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. e. If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format: a. To export part of the coverage prediction: a.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format To export a coverage prediction in vector format: 1. The Raster Export dialogue appears.10. In the Save As dialogue. If desired. To export the entire coverage prediction: Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. In the Save As dialogue.

by a transmitter attribute. The Save As dialogue appears. Click Save. The context menu appears. Notes • When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in Atoll. 2. Select File > Save Image As. Note: When you export several coverage predictions at the same time.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions If you have several coverage predictions that you want to export. you can export them at the same time. 4. 6. You can select: Selection: The area on the map selected in step 1. In the Map Export dialogue. BIL. When saving in BIL format. In the Coverage Export dialogue. The selected coverage predictions are saved in the selected folder. Define the area to save: a.4. enter a File name. by path loss. 3. If you wish to use the saved file as a digital terrain model. The Map Export dialogue appears. 3. Atoll will add the date and time to the file name of each exported coverage prediction. move the Smoothing slider. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. by signal level.4. 6. Click OK to finish exporting the coverage prediction results. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 39 . Drag to the opposite corner. or by total losses). 4. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. or TXT format. 8.Chapter 1: The Working Environment The Geographic Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the geographic export zone. 5. Right-click the the Predictions folder. • You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. By default. The geographic export zone is only taken into consideration for raster file formats. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears. the file is converted using the selected coordinate system. Time stamp: If you select the Time stamp check box. Click the Select an area button ( 2. you can define the following parameters: Folder: Enter the folder you want to store the exported coverage predictions in or click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to it. select the zone that you wish to save as an image. or enter the percentage in the text box. b. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. 7. c. Click Export to export the selected coverage predictions. Atoll selects the check boxes of all coverage predictions whose visibility check box is selected on the Data tab of the Explorer window. and ArcView Grid (TXT). coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. BMP.10. and select a file type from the Save as type list. Click Export. Resolution in metres: You can define a resolution for the exported coverage predictions. Atoll does not take the geographic export zone into consideration. Geographic Export Zone Printing Zone ) in the Map toolbar. BIL. select a destination folder.11 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image You can save a map as a graphic image. Select Export Coverages from the context menu. Atoll allows you to save files larger than 2 Gb. The following file formats are supported: TIF. To save a map as a graphic image: 1. 5. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. In the Save as dialogue. The Coverage Export dialogue appears. b. select the check boxes corresponding to the coverage predictions you want to export. If desired. Under Options. 1. you should select the TIF. Format: Select the vector file format you want Atoll to export the coverage predictions in. 1. To export several coverage predictions at the same time: 1.

click and drag diagonally. Click OK. Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size. 8. b. select Picture (Enhanced Metafile). you can define the zone to be displayed on the map. is pasted as an image into the new document. If you wish to export the image with rulers. on the map. To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application: 1.4. Click OK. you can define a zone to print or copy and. select Include Rulers. The Copy Image dialogue appears.4. in the Panoramic window. select Scale. To draw a polygon. once to create each corner. In the Paste Special dialogue. and each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. including the rulers. 3. The zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out at the location of the mouse pointer The zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking and dragging to define the area. the pointer appears in different forms according to its function. 1. The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites or links. or draw vector or raster polygons on the map. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways: Select Use Screen Resolution Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres. Close the polygon by clicking twice. To define a zone. or Text to paste the upper left and lower right coordinates of the selection. Select Edit > Copy Image. The area of the map. Define the area to copy: a. you must define the size of the exported image by pixel size. Atoll then creates a geo-reference file for the exported image. 1. 6. and by double-clicking to close the polygon. draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/ eographic export Polygon drawing zones. To define a zone. select Edit > Paste Special. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. The pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone. 9. or draw vector or raster rectangles on the map. In the new application.13 Map Window Pointers In Atoll. 7. Click OK. by clicking once to start the polygon. click pointer once to start. Drag to the opposite corner. Each pointer is described below: Appearance Description Selection arrow Meaning The zone selection pointer indicates that.Atoll User Manual Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale. Click the Select an area button ( 2. select Pixel Size. Open the application into which you want to paste the image. Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model. Zoom area Pencil 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 5. click and drag diagonally. Rectangle drawing pointer Hand Zoom tool The rectangle drawing pointer indicates you can draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/geographic export zones. 4. ) in the Map toolbar. and enter a pixel size in the text box. 9. The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map.12 Copying a Map to Another Application You can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application. Note: You can also select Bitmap to paste the selection without rulers. enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution.

3. The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the map window. the distance between the first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar.) in the form of tables. Deleting. You can move an existing point by clicking and dragging an existing point. You can filter. Select Open Table from the context menu. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables. In the case of a point-to-multipoint. 1. sort. microwave links. 2. You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • "Opening a Data Table" on page 41 "Adding. The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the second point. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by clicking on one of the edges and dragging. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42 "Editing the Contents of a Table" on page 43 "Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 44 "Defining the Table Format" on page 44 "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47 "Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents" on page 49 "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49 "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50 "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51 "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. and group the data contained in these tables. etc. The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna. delete the polygon. each subsequent link creates anew point. You can right-click to open a context menu to delete a point. You can also export the data or import data into the Atoll data tables. connected to the hub by a link.5. As you move the pointer. The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start point of your measurement. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 41 . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. In the case of a multihop link. Once you have created the first point. antennas. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. containing all their parameters and characteristics. and view a statistical analysis of the data. you can create a default value for a field you create. delete the polygon. or centre the map on the polygon. Select/create points Microwave link start End Multi-hop or point-tomultipoint microwave link Rotate hub antenna of point-tomultipoint link Measurements on the map Terrain section 1. The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a microwave link.5 Working with Data Tables Atoll stores object data (sites. or centre the map on the polygon. each subsequent click creates another point in the link. The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon.1 Opening a Data Table To open a data table: 1. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab. Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a point. In this section. The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link. the microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Appearance Description Deletion Position indicator Meaning The deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal clutter zone by clicking its border. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user can choose when filling in the field. When you create a new column.

To access an object type’s table fields: 1. Default Value: If you want. Right-click the table in the map window. you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. you can select a group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. the following functions are explained: • • • "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42 "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42 "Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 43 1. enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this object type. 3. Every data table in Atoll is created with a default set of columns. In the Explorer window.5.13: The Table tab 1. - 42 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Default value of the field. In this section. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42. or currency) Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. 3.5. A dialogue appears where you can view the existing fields and add or delete new ones. you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. The context menu appears. single.2. instead of loading all custom fields. The Group to which the field belongs. Select Table Fields from the context menu. Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. You can create a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box. The Type of the field. Deleting. instead of loading all custom fields. 2. The dialogue displays the following information for each type of data (see Figure 1. each corresponding to a field.2 Adding. Figure 1.5. short integer. To add a custom field to an object type’s data table: 1.14). double.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields The fields contained in an object type’s table are defined in a dialogue. separating each list item with a hard return. date/time. The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend). open the data table as described in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1. When opening an Atoll document from a database. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes: Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database Group: If desired. and Editing Data Table Fields The data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table.2.Atoll User Manual 1. 2. true/false.13): The Name of the field in the database (Name). When you open an Atoll document from a database. Click Add. The maximum Size of the field. Type: Select a type for the field (text. Enter a size in characters. long integer.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table You can add a custom field to any object type’s data table.

Your changes are automatically saved.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 4. 1.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table You can delete custom fields from an object type’s data table. Tip: Some fields can not be deleted. Figure 1. Select the custom field that you want to delete.3 Editing the Contents of a Table To edit the contents of a table: 1. You can find these fields in the Other Properties tab of an object type’s Properties dialogue. The field is deleted from the object type’s data table. 3. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. 2.5. 4. Make sure that you are not deleting important information. Select Open Table from the context menu.5. 2. If you select a field and the Delete button remains unavailable. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1. you can select a value from the list (see Figure 1. Tip: If a list of options has been defined for a field. To delete a custom field from an object type’s data table: Caution: All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself.14: The Field Definition dialogue 1. 3. Click OK to return to the object type table. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. Note: User or custom fields are for information only and are not taken into account in any calculation. as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.15). Click Delete. the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted. Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an object type’s data table. 1. 5.2.16) or enter a new value. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 43 .

Right-click the record whose properties you want to see. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Note: You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record. a site.16: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables 1. from its data table.15: Editing data in the transmitters data tables Figure 1. antenna. To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object: 1. To avoid editing the record when you double-click. double-click the left margin of the record instead of the record itself. for example. 3.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table You can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object.5 Defining the Table Format Atoll lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented. You can change the format of the data table by: • • • • • • "Formatting the Column Headers" on page 45 "Formatting Table Columns" on page 45 "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45 "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 46 "Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 46 "Moving Columns" on page 46 44 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or cell.5. 2. 1. Select Record Properties from the context menu. transmitter.5.

Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. 3. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1. The Format dialogue appears. 2. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. font Size. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Effects. you change the row height for every row in the table. 4. and the Colour for each column header. by selecting a Foreground colour. and Text Colour. you change the width only for the selected column. Effects. the Type. Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1.17). Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Select Format > Column Format. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 2. Changing Column Width or Row Height You can change the column width and row height in a data table. To change the row height: 1. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. font Size. The Format dialogue appears.17: Changing column width Figure 1. Click OK. and Text Colour. When you change the row height.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Formatting the Column Headers 1. the Type. Outline (the font style). 2. a Background colour. To change the column width: 1. Click OK. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 4. and the Colour for each column header. by selecting a Foreground colour.18: Changing row height © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 45 . You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. Borders: You can select the Border. Outline (the font style). and a pattern from the list box. Formatting Table Columns 1. Select Format > Header Format. 3.18). Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. Figure 1. a Background colour. 2. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. Borders: You can select the Border. however. When you change the column width. and a pattern from the list box.

19: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue Note: You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns command from the context menu. 2. To unfreeze columns: • Select Format > Unfreeze columns. 3. You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. 46 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . clear its check box. Figure 1. You can keep this column. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 4.19). Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Freezing or Unfreezing a Column In Atoll. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. To display or hide a column: 1. or any other column visible. you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontally through the table. 5. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men. 2. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1. you might want to have the Name column always visible. you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to move. Select the header of the column you want to move. Tip: You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. To hide a column. Note: You can not freeze a column in a report table. Note: You can only freeze adjacent columns. 2. To freeze a column: 1. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to freeze. Click Close. Moving Columns In Atoll. select its check box. For example.Atoll User Manual Displaying or Hiding a Column You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide. To move a column: 1. 3. while scrolling through the Sites table. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. To display a column. by freezing it.

Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area. You can copy and paste data to create new elements or you can copy and paste the same data into several cells." You can edit this name. 4. To paste the same data into several cells: 1. pasting it into a new row and editing the details that are different.1 Copying and Pasting a Table Element You can create a new element in tables by copying an existing element.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent. creates a new element from the copied data. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the element to select the entire row. Figure 1. the following is explained: • • "Copying and Pasting a Table Element" on page 47 "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 47. and Paste (CTRL+V) commands on the Edit menu. 2. 2. 1. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data (see Figure 1. Select Edit > Copy to copy the table row. As you drag the column. 5. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables In Atoll. you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C).6. 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. The name of the new element is the same as that of the copied element.21).6. Click in the left margin of the table row marked with the New Row icon ( ) to select the entire row.5.5.20: Moving columns Note: It may be necessary to click Refresh in the Map toolbar for your changes to appear. 3.20). 1. 3. preceded by "Copy of. using Fill Up or Fill Down. Cut (CTRL+X). Note: Each element in a table must have a unique Name. In this section.5. Select Edit > Paste to paste the copied data into the new row. the position the column will occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 47 . To create a new element by copying and pasting: 1. Atoll.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells You can paste the same data into several cells.

Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells.22: Copying the contents of the top cell To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells.22).23). select Edit > Fill > Up (see Figure 1.21: Selecting the cells 3. Figure 1.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.23: Copying the contents of the bottom cell 48 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Figure 1. select Edit > Fill > Down (see Figure 1.

The context menu appears. To view a statistical analysis of a selection of cells in one column: Select the cells you want to analyse. 2. You can see how the exported table will appear in the Preview pane (see Figure 1. The entire column is selected.5. The contents of the Statistics dialogue are updated automatically. For more information. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last cell. Right-click the table. 3. 1. or by clicking the first cell. 2. You can select contiguous cells by clicking the first cell and dragging to the last cell of the selection you want to analyse. or selected columns. see "Grouping. 3.7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents You can view a statistical analysis of the contents of an entire column in a table or of the contents of a selection of cells.5.24). and Filtering Data" on page 56. The context menu appears. The Export dialogue appears. and Comma Separated Value. Select the column data you want to analyse: To view a statistical analysis of an entire column: Click the column title. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Right-click the selection of cells.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. TXT. allowing you to select only certain data.24: The Statistics dialogue The statistics displayed depend on the type of numerical data selected. to ASCII text files (in text. formats) and to MS Excel files. You can select non-contiguous cells by pressing CTRL and clicking each cell in the column separately. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. you can view the statistical analysis of other cells by selecting them in the table. Select Statistics from the context menu.8 Exporting Tables to Text Files You can export entire Atoll data tables. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 49 . Sorting. Tip: In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways. To export a table: 1. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 4.25). Figure 1. Select Export from the context menu. If you leave the Statistics dialogue open. CSV. To view a statistical analysis of table contents: 1.

You can export the Sites. Right-click the table. The Save As dialogue appears. Click Export. c. The next time you export a data table. Links. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported. 10. a. select the field in the Available Fields box and click to the Exported Fields list. Multi-Hops. 50 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select a Field Separator from the list. 8. 1. enter the File name and select the format from the Save as type list. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. The context menu appears. The fields at the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table. 6. 7. To change the order of the fields. to move it b. To import a table: 1. 5. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. For information on importing data into a data table. and Point to Multipoint tables to text files by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+E. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50.5. To select a field to be exported. you can click Load in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. In the Save As dialogue.9 Importing Tables from Text Files You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into Atoll data tables. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 9.25: Exporting a data table 4. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. select the field in the Exported Fields list and click to remove it. Click Save to export the table. 2. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. Select the fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name.

8. Select Import from the context menu. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. If the Update Records check box is not selected. See "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45. The contents are imported in the current Atoll data table. Links. The Open dialogue appears. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box. 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 51 . The values of these records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected. 7. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table. The next time you export a data table.26). there are two header rows: Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing. 9. Select a Field Separator from the list. Under Field Mapping. 6. Select <Ignore> for source file columns that you do not want to import. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Destination row and selecting the corresponding column from the Atoll data file (see Figure 1. and Point to Multipoint tables by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+I. Tip: You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC.26). Multi-Hops. For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file. You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears.10 Exporting Tables to XML Files You can export the data tables in your Atoll document to XML files. you can click Load in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Click Import. You can import data from text files into the Sites. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 4.26: Importing information into a data table 5. Note: Atoll compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the values in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist. Figure 1. these records are not imported.5.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. Note: 10. Destination: The column headers from the Atoll data table.

select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally to the opposite corner.xml file is located. 1. Select the folder where the index. etc.xml file because the order in which the data is imported is very important. This section explains the following: • • • "Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 52 "Printing a Map" on page 52 "Printing a Docking Window" on page 56 1. 3. . data tables. For example.6 Printing in Atoll In Atoll. For information on exporting the data tables in your document to XML files. see "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. antennas used by transmitters must be imported before the transmitters themselves. and an index. predictions. Do not modify the order of tables in the index. and a duplicate records check to ensure that the import did not create database problems. both be printed in the same way. For information on importing the data tables from XML files into your document.6. etc. etc.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports Data tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in Atoll and can. Select File > Print. CDMA.xml file also stores the information on the system (GSM.). choose Selected in the Print dialogue.11 Importing Tables from XML Files You can import data tables into your Atoll document from XML files.. . Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Export. the technologyTDMA. the technologyTDMA. Click OK. Select the folder where the XML files are to be stored. All the data tables in the document are exported to XML files. some data must be imported before other data.5. To print a table: 1. document reports. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Import. etc. you can print any part of your document. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55. etc. 1.xml file are imported in the document . 4. Click OK to print. The data tables from the XML files listed in the index.xml file. existing data in the tables are overwritten by the data from the XML files. 2.2 Printing a Map You can print a map in Atoll and create a paper copy of studies. To import data tables into your document from XML files: 1. For more information about the formats of the XML files. The index. 2. and the version of Atoll with which the XML files were created. 5. 1. Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed map. including A4 and A0. 2. For more information about the formats of the XML files.Atoll User Manual Atoll creates one XML file for each exported data table. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. 3. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears.xml file that contains the mapping between the tables that were exported and the XML files corresponding to each data table.. see "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51. see the Technical Reference Guide. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes. the XML files and the current Atoll document must use the same system (GSM. and the Atoll version used to create the XML files must be the same as the version used to import the data. CDMA. If you want to print only a selected area. Note: Tables are imported in the same order they appear in the index. In order for Atoll to be able to correctly import the data tables from XML files. including maps. and antenna patterns.6. If you want to print an area of the table. During the import procedure. UMTS. Click the Make New Folder button if you want to create a new folder to store the XML files. To export all the data tables in your document to XML files: 1. Click OK. therefore.). You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. 52 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll performs a database integrity check. If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed. Once the import is complete. UMTS. see the Technical Reference Guide. 3.

1. Objects in Atoll are arranged in layers. This will ensure that these vector layers are visible when you print the map. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu. You now have the following options before printing the map: You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). or airport). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Right-click the Printing Zone folder. are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. 2. Before printing for the first time. To create a printing zone: 1. In the Explorer window. You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). 4.1 Printing Recommendations The appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains. Antennas. or clutter height maps (non-transparent maps).6. Select File > Print. however. geoclimatic. Draw the printing zone: a. The context menu appears. or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways: • • Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53). The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). 5. traffic maps (vector or raster).): • • • • • • Points (vectors) Roads and Lines (vectors) Surface polygons (vectors) Multi-format maps . the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. 4. Before printing a map. To print a map: 1. 3. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. Sites and transmitters must be above all the other layers. you should review the "Printing Recommendations" on page 53 to avoid any memory-related problems. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. you have the following options: • You can print the entire map. over predictions.2. Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer. To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions: 1. 3. sites.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Before you print a map. 2. it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows. and points (measurements. it is strongly recommended to put vector layers. etc. and predictions. Click OK. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. and others Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps) Images. 1.population. Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). For performance reasons.6. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. visible objects on the Data tab. If you clear the printing zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. When you release the mouse. 4. and Transmitters. For this reason. The printing zone is delimited by a light green line (see Figure 1. 3.2 Defining the Printing Zone You can define an area to be printed. lines (vectors such as roads. for example. b. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites. such as roads.27). transmitters. Select Draw from the context menu. when a document contains surface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps). The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of these layers (for information on transparency. DTM. You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). 5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. The context menu appears. 2. click the Geo tab. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 53 . You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). Click the Data tab. Select the document window containing the map.2.

Add a title.6. allowing you to define a standard appearance which you can then import the next time you print a similar document. For more information on the polygon editing tools. you can: • • • • • • Set the scale of the map.3 Defining the Print Layout You can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. 1. or footer. To define the appearance of the map when it is printed: 1. comment. On the Print Setup dialogue. You can import it by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. • Once you have created a printing zone. Choose to print the legend. 54 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Choose to print the rulers with the map. Select File > Print Setup. The Print Setup dialogue appears. you can click the Import button under Configuration to import those settings. and the Header/Footer tab. Select paper size and source.27: Printing zone You can also create a printing zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the printing zone. by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. as well as the page orientation and the margins. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a printing zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Printing Zone from the context menu.2. You can see any changes you make in the schematic preview on the right side of the Print Setup dialogue. you can change its size by dragging the edges of the zone displayed on the rulers of the map window. Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. Note: If you have previously defined a configuration file containing all the necessary settings. you can import it and use it as a printing zone. You define the print set up on the Page tab. logo. the Components tab. Choose to print the area outside the focus zone. You can also use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit the printing zone. These settings can be saved as a configuration. Note: You can export the printing zone as a polygon. header.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.

5. For the selected check box. b. and orientation and the scale of the printed map: a. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. This enables you to re-use the same settings the next time by importing them. you can define the appearance of the printed map: Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 2. Select the Area inside focus zone only check box if you only want to print the part of the map inside the focus zone. select the On the map check box. v. If you want the title to appear on the map (and not outside of it).6. you can preview your printing. Select the Map Title check box if you want to define a title for the map and set its Position. select the On the map check box. a.bmp is present in this folder. select the On the map check box. However. Under Logo 1 and Logo 2. Note: Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. If you want the comment to appear on the map (and not outside of it). click the Properties button. Click a button to set the Position of the legend. such as copyright information. click OK to close the Print Setup dialogue. Select the Comments check box if you want to print a comment with the map and set its Position. Under Map. the Source of the paper. set the margins of the page in millimetres. b. Note: You can save the current settings as a configuration file by clicking the Export button under Configuration. d. Under Paper. The Logo dialogue appears. Atoll searches for the header and footer logos in the Atoll’s installation folder. Once you have made your settings. optionally. The buttons inside the square will place the legend on top of the map. By default. Select the Header/Footer check box if you want to define a header or footer for the map and set its Position. c. The Open dialogue appears. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. it is considered as the default header logo. Under Orientation. Under Margins. On the Page tab.3 © Forsk 2010 Previewing Your Printing When you want to print maps. On the Header/Footer tab. you can set the position of graphic elements. Click the Page tab. iv. iii. you can define the page size. Click the Components tab. b. or click Print to print the document. a. i. 4. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels). you can define the placement of the legend. in the form of a BMP graphic. - Click a Font button to open the Font dialogue to define the font of the legend. define the scale of the printed image either by selecting Fit to page. If your logo is in a different format. c. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open. Under Scaling. The graphics can be a company logo or other information. or by selecting Scale and defining the scale. Click OK. c. you can select a different file. Select the Legend check box if you want to print a legend with the map. Click the Header/Footer tab. 3. you must first convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 55 . data tables. select whether the page should be printed in Portrait or Landscape. or reports. 1. Under Legend. select the Size of the paper and. margins. The buttons outside of the square will place the legend outside of the map. you can define graphics that appear for the map. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. If a file named logo. ii. If you want the header or footer to appear on the map (and not outside of it). Click File.

you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit properties on all grouped objects.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property You can group data objects by a selected property using the Group By command on the context menu. 4. or by several. This section explains: • • • "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 56 "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57 "Advanced Grouping" on page 58. 1. 1. Select File > Print Preview. see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) To print the content of a docking window: 1. or filter data. For examples of grouping data objects. The objects to be grouped can be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71). Click OK to print. Select Print from the context menu. Click Two Page to display two pages side by side Click One Page to display a single page. 2. and Filtering Data In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the data table because it puts all records with the selected property together. you can click one of the following buttons: Click Print to open the Print dialogue. For information. allowing you to select only certain data and then. see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide. You can also define the properties by which you can group objects. sort. 1. as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 52. Drive Test Data Analysis Tool Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool. 3. for example. or filter data quickly by one criterion. The Print Preview window appears. The docking windows whose contents you can print are: • • • • • Legend Window (for more information on this tool. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24) Point Analysis Tool CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool. Once you have grouped data objects. Open the docking window you want to print. Right-click the window you wish to print. Click Zoom In to zoom in on the print preview.7.Atoll User Manual To preview your printing: 1. After you have defined how you will group.1 Grouping Data Objects You can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window.1. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration.6. Click Next Page to display the following page Click Prev Page to display the previous page. click the tab of the study you want to print.4 Printing a Docking Window You can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu. Atoll allows you to group. sort. If you want to print a Point Analysis window. Click Zoom Out to zoom out on the print preview. Sorting. 56 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Print dialogue appears. selecting File > Print only prints the contents of a document window.7 Grouping. 2. At the top of the Print Preview window. In this section the following will be explained: • • • • • "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56 "Sorting Data" on page 60 "Filtering Data" on page 62 "Folder Configurations" on page 69 "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71 1. Select the map or table you want to print.7. you can save this information as a folder configuration. see "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. modify only selected data or run calculations on the selected data. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69.

2. from top to bottom. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list. The context menu appears. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the properties that are relevant for grouping. To change the order of the fields. To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields.28). To configure the Group By submenu: 1. Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57.1. 7. 3. To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu. To undo the grouping: 1. From the context menu. 2. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. 2. The Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. For information on using the dialogue that appears. select from the Group By > None. 1. The context menu appears. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. such as transmitters. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group By submenu. Select Properties from the context menu. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To group data objects by a selected property: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 57 . select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Grouping Fields list. select the property by which you want to group the objects. The Group By submenu will now contain only the fields you selected. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure. 3. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu. From the Group By submenu.7. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. 5. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Figure 1.28: The Configuration dialogue 6. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click to remove it.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu Some data objects. See "Examples of Grouping" on page 59.

1.30: The Group dialogue 6. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Figure 1. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.1. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. Atoll creates subfolders for each site with a microwave link and sorts the links by site (see Figure 1.29: Grouping microwave links by site To restore normal display of microwave links: 1. 3.4 Advanced Grouping You can group data objects by one or more properties. To group data objects by one or more properties: 1. 4. The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1.7. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. 1. 4. To change the order of the fields. 3. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. select the field in the Group these fields in this order list and click to remove it. 2. Click the Group By button. The context menu appears.29). Select Properties from the context menu.30). using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. Right-click the Links folder.7. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. 58 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. To select a field to be used to group the objects. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Group these fields in this order list. The context menu appears.3 Grouping Microwave Links by Site You can find all the microwave links that are connected to a specific site by grouping all links by site. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. The default display of the contents of the Links folder is restored.Atoll User Manual 1. 5. Select the fields by which you want to group the objects. Figure 1. To group microwave links by site: 1. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list. from top to bottom.

31). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 7.5 Examples of Grouping In this example. select from the Group By > None. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects. From the context menu.7.1. you can only see a very long list of transmitters under the Transmitter folder. therefore. To undo the grouping: 1.32.31: Grouping transmitters by site The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. 2. transmitters. in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Site (Figure 1. Figure 1. While it is easy to see on the map which transmitters are part of which site. Figure 1. 3. you can group the transmitters by the site they are located on. there is an Atoll document with a large number of sites and.32: Transmitters grouped by site © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 59 . 1.

1 Sorting Data in Tables When sorting data in tables. when you are working on a certain area of the network.2. You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. Figure 1. 60 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .7. 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A. Atoll sorts the records by the first column and then. you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. Once you have sorted data objects. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. within each group of identical values in the first column.2 Sorting Data In Atoll. You can sort the data in ascending (A to Z. and so on.32.33: Grouping transmitters by zone The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. For information. By grouping them by computation or focus zone.34: Transmitters grouped by site 1. The transmitters are now in two groups: those inside the focus zone and those outside the focus zone. you can group the transmitters in the focus zone together.7. the transmitters you are working on are immediately visible under the Transmitter folder. you can save the settings as a folder configuration. When you sort data by several columns. for example. Figure 1. This section explains the following: • • "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 "Advanced Sorting" on page 61 1. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Polygon > Focus Zone (Figure 1. you can sort by one column or by several columns. 10 to 1) order. You normally create a computation or focus zone when you want to concentrate on a given subset of transmitters. Atoll then sorts the records by the second column.31).Atoll User Manual You can also group objects by the computation or focus zone.

Sorting by Several Columns You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns. 7. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. 8.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Sorting by One Column To sort data in a table by one column: 1. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61. 6. For the first column you want to sort on: a. 2. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. 1. For information. If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent. Select the header of the column that you want to sort on. 3. 2. 5. For each other column you want to sort on: a. The entire column is selected. Click the Sort button. The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1. you can use the Sort function on the Properties dialogue. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowest value. The context menu appears.2. Click OK. Tip: If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns. 4. 4. From the context menu. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highest value. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highest value. The context menu appears 3. 2.2 Advanced Sorting You can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue. you can move the columns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 46. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. To sort data in a table by several columns: 1. Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 61 . The entire column is selected. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue.35). Select the column name from the Sort by list. b. 3. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue: 1. b. The context menu appears. Select the column name from the And by list. Right-click the column header. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowest value.7. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references. From the context menu. Right-click the column headers. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order.

1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection You can filter a data table by selecting one or more values.36 on page 62). For information. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.3 Filtering Data In Atoll. To filter a data table on one or more fields: 1. 1.3. Select one of the following from the Records menu: Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed.7. To select more than one value. Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed. or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. - Figure 1. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. Once you have selected one or more values. you can choose to view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value.37 on page 63). see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. This section explains the following: • • • • "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62 "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63 "Restoring All Records" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.35: The Sort dialogue 1. The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria. press CTRL as you click the other values. 2.7. 3.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Select the value to filter on. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1. you can filter data according to one or several criteria.36: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209) 62 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

4. Click the Filter tab: a. Figure 1. Select a Field from the list. In the Column row. Note: Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. Select Records > Advanced Filter. Click the Advanced tab: a. Tip: You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dialogue. 3.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 1.37: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209) 1. To create an advanced filter: 1. you will find all the values represented in the selected field. b.38: The Filter dialogue . The Filter dialogue appears. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes.2 Advanced Data Filtering You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters.Advanced tab b. 2. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Under Values to Include. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter.38). Underneath each column name. enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table: Formula =X <> X <X Data are kept in the table only if value equal to X (X may be a number or characters) value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters) numerical value is less than X © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 63 .7. select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list.3.

1. • • The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidth under 100° but over 50°. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63): • The first criterion. as shown in Figure 1. While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein").1 Advanced Filtering: Example 1 In this example. it is not necessary because there is only one manufacturer with a "K. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. To restore all records: • Select Records > Remove Filter. 64 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .4 Advanced Filtering: Examples In this section.3.39: Initial table The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.7.3.3 Restoring All Records After you have applied filter criteria to records." The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100°. you will find a few examples of advanced filtering: • • • "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Example 2" on page 65 "Advanced Filtering: Example 3" on page 65.Atoll User Manual Formula >X <=X >=X *X* X* Data are kept in the table only if numerical value is greater than X numerical value is less than or equal to X numerical value is greater than or equal to X text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5.7. is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.4. 1.3. the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab.40. you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again. Figure 1. Filters are combined first horizontally. then vertically. To do this. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.40. The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50°. there is an Atoll document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics. 1.7.

in this case.3. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.41.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64.4. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. with "> 50" placed under "< 100".7. however.4.41: Errors in filtering As previously stated. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63).40. 1. The resulting filter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100°.3. However. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 65 . the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). or all antennas over 50°. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63). the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").7. in this case.3 Advanced Filtering: Example 3 In this example. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.42. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.40: Advanced filtering 1.2 Advanced Filtering: Example 2 In this example. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100° and over 50°) is malformed.40. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. Figure 1. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64. it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition. however. all antennas are displayed.

the filter only generates an error message and no antennas are filtered out. you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an Atoll document open. because the second criterion is malformed. Folder configurations: Sorting. Macros: The complete path of any macros.). If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database.7. name. such as geographic data. see the Administrator Manual. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones are being exported in the user configuration file.42: Errors in filtering As previously stated. you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor. When you create a user configuration file. to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same settings. and indoor loss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. the filtering zone. height.4 User Configurations In Atoll. transparency. In this section. tips text. etc.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. default standard deviations. • • For a detailed description of the user configuration file. The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file. the information stored in a user configuration. Atoll gives the file the extension "GEO. even if not saved). indoor loss. map display settings (such as. orthogonality factor. you can export the following information: • Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps. • • Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document. You can create a user configuration file. is not stored in the database. 1." Because the file is in XML (eXtensible Markup Language). clutter description (code. Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links. Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as the raster maps. you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings in another document. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. the visibility scale. standard deviations. the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class. the coordinate system of any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data. grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67 "Importing a User Configuration" on page 67. and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display settings). however. 66 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . However. and not to a specific Atoll document. Because a macro is linked to an Atoll session.

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 67 .4. you can create lists of sites. 3. The Save As dialogue appears.44).44: Importing a user configuration 4. 5.7. Figure 1. The folder configuration has been saved.7. 4. as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. Select the check boxes of the information you want to import.7. Click OK.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. you can modify the list and use it to filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. Click OK. 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. it into your current Atoll document.43).4. Once you have created a site list. or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration.43: Exporting a user configuration 2. 3.5 Site Lists In Atoll. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. 2. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. Figure 1. To export a user configuration: 1. 1.1 Exporting a User Configuration You create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file. Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import.2 Importing a User Configuration You can import a user configuration that you or another user has created. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. The Open dialogue appears. To import a user configuration: 1. The user configuration is imported. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. Click Open.

To add a site to a list: 1. The site is added to the selected list. In this section. right-click the site you want to add to a list. To create a site list: 1.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the Explorer window. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to create a site list: a. A dialogue appears.Atoll User Manual In a multi-user environment.5. 1. In the map window. The site is added to the selected list. 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To add a site to a list: 1. Click OK.5. The context menu appears. 1. A dialogue appears. Click OK. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. you can add the filtered contents of folder to the list you select.7. this allows you to more effectively manage your resources by reducing the unnecessary data you retrieve from the database. site lists can be stored in the database.5. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. b. 2. The context menu appears. Tip: You can quickly create a complete list by first filtering the contents of the Sites folder as explained in "Filtering Data" on page 62.1 Creating a Site List You can create lists of sites that you can then use to filter the data displayed.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the map window. 3. you can select the sites to load according to any defined site lists. The selected site will be added to the new list. The Site Lists table appears. 2. When you open a document from a database. Right-click the site you want to add to the list. The selected site will be added to the new list. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 4. 2. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Site List" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window" on page 68 "Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone" on page 68 "Editing a Site List" on page 69 "Filtering on a Site List" on page 69.7. by right-clicking the Sites folder and selecting Site Lists > Add Sites to a List from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.5. 3. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu.7. 1. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.4 68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone You can add the sites contained in a zone to a site or transmitter list. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. 5. 1. Enter the name of the new list in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). Right-click the Sites folder. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list.7. Then. In a large radio-planning project. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Sites folder to expand the folder.

The Properties dialogue appears. or sorting criteria. sorted. A dialogue appears. Right-click the Sites folder. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. 3.6 Folder Configurations In Atoll.7. the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. Click OK. 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add the sites contained in a zone to a list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To filter folder contents using a site list: 1. The selected site will be added to the new list. b. filtering. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 69 . Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu.7. On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 4. 3. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 71. 4. Press DEL to delete the site from the list. The Filter dialogue appears. there will be an additional tab: Sites: Click the Site Lists tab. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. You can define folder configurations and save them.7. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. Select the check box of the list or lists that you want to display. 3. or filtered are referred to as a folder configuration. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. You can now edit the list: To add a site to the list: Select the name of the site in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). Click OK when you have finished editing the site list. In this section. 7. The sites contained in the zone are added to the selected list. Click OK to close the Filter dialogue. Select Properties from the context menu. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. computation. If you have created a list.5 Editing a Site List You can edit a site list using the Site List table. To edit a site list: 1. Only sites that belong to the selected list are now displayed in the Data tab of the Explorer window and in the map window. To delete a site from the list: a. b.6 Filtering on a Site List You can use site or transmitter lists to filter the contents of Sites folder. The context menu appears. 4. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The Site Lists table appears. focus. 8. Create a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 that contains the sites you want to add to a list. 1. Select the name of the list you want to edit and click Properties.5. allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping. 6. Click in the left margin of the row containing the site to select it. Right-click the folder whose contents you want to filter. printing. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to edit a site list: a. 2. The context menu appears. You can use a filtering.5. 5. 2. or geographic export zone. right-click the zone and select the following from the context menu: Add Sites to a List: Select Add Sites to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list. 1. click the Filter button.

4. To export a folder configuration: 1.43 on page 67). Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save. Under Configuration. Click OK.6. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue.Atoll User Manual 1. In this case. If you want to export other configurations at the same time.6. 1. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue. you can export it as part of a user configuration to an external file.5 Importing a Folder Configuration Once you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70. or sorted a data folder. The folder configuration is applied to the current folder.7. or sorted as a folder configuration. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. set the following parameters as desired: Group By (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). Select the Folder Configuration check box. To reapply the folder configuration: 1. 7. select those check boxes as well. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration. 1. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration When you create a folder configuration. To apply a saved folder configuration: 1. To import a folder configuration: 1. The Save As dialogue appears. you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data.7.7. so that it can be used in other documents. Select Properties from the context menu. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. filtered. 6. To create a configuration: 1. 3.1 Creating a Folder Configuration In Atoll. If you then add or modify data. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu. 2. 2. The Open dialogue appears. However. 4.44 on page 67). Select the Folder Configuration check box. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration If you have grouped. The folder configuration has been saved. filtered. you can import it into your current document. click Save. 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. 3. the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 1.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration You can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder. 3.6. The context menu appears.7. select the name of the configuration you want to apply. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. If you have not yet done so. 2. 2. 4. The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it from the Configurations submenu on the folder’s context menu. Click Open.6. 3. On the Configurations submenu.6. 5. 3.7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 70 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you save it to the current ATL document. The previously configured folder configuration is reapplied to the data. 8. you have created and applied a folder configuration.

Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the object folder in which it was created.7 Creating and Comparing Subfolders You can compare the effects of different grouping. you can rename each one to give it a more descriptive name. or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders in the Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. 3. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). 4.7. Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone In Atoll. with its associated grouping. or filtering settings. The folder configuration is deleted. it is deleted immediately. Select Properties from the context menu. select those check boxes as well. To create a subfolder of a folder: 1. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. select the name of the configuration from the list. with its grouping.6. you can compare the differences. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Tip: If you have created several subfolders. the data reappear under the initial folder. 3. on the map. you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calculations. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 71 . For information on renaming an object. Click Delete. you can refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. or filtering settings of the selected subfolder. 2. To delete a subfolder: • Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu. The folder configuration is imported. by displaying in turn each subfolder.7. after deleting the last subfolder.7. the data do not reappear under the initial folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Under Configuration. You can remove subfolders by deleting them. To compare subfolders: 1. Click OK. are displayed on the map. sorting. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu. Caution: When you delete a folder configuration. leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration You can delete a folder configuration from the Atoll document when you no longer need it. sorting. sorting. 6. 5. 1. Atoll will not ask for confirmation. depending on the different grouping.Chapter 1: The Working Environment If you want to import other configurations at the same time. To delete a folder configuration: 1. The data objects of the selected subfolder. Tip: If. By limiting the number of sites. How the objects are displayed on the map will change. 2. the data contained are not deleted. The data objects are not displayed on the map. For more information on display properties. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. When you delete the last subfolder. right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of. 2. When you delete a subfolder. sorting. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original folder content. clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. 1. Select the check box of one of the subfolders. 5. or filtering settings. 1.

You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zone or you can draw a new filtering zone. modifying the antenna azimuth. or links) by their name. • To undo an action: • Select Edit > Undo. pasting in tables. transmitters. and moving a site.1 Undoing and Redoing You can undo or redo most actions in Atoll. On the Data tab of the Explorer window. When you have applied a polygon filter.3.8 Tips and Tricks In this section. 1. You can search for some objects (sites. Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( folder contents have been filtered.8.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders Under certain circumstances. coverage predictions. repeaters or remote antennas. repeaters. 72 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can search for a site. up to a maximum of 10 actions. the data displayed on the map or in the Explorer window. The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables. you can perform the following actions on the filtered data: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). antennas. groups of hexagons. a simulation. the Undo and Redo histories are erased. maps. To redo an action that you have undone: • Select Edit > Redo.8. or a vector by any text field. ). measurement paths. links. This section explains: • • • "Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 72 "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73 "Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 73.Atoll User Manual objects on the map clearer. 1.8. You can refresh the display to get Atoll to reload the data and reapply the current configurations to folders. 1. for example. For example. To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map: • Click the Refresh button ( ) on the toolbar or press F5. when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter. 1. propagation models. to indicate that the For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone. Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records. a microwave link. If you perform an action that can not be undone. for example. By using the Location Finder. a station or a group of stations. you can undo or redo: • • Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating. may not be actual. transmitters.3 Searching for Objects on the Map Atoll provides several tools for finding data objects on the map. see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29. etc. you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with Atoll: • • • • • • • "Undoing and Redoing" on page 72 "Refreshing Maps and Folders" on page 72 "Searching for Objects on the Map" on page 72 "Using the Status Bar to Get Information" on page 73 "Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer" on page 74 "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74 "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75. moving a transmitter. or deleting a transmitter. 1. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a point on the map by its x and y coordinates.).8. using the Find toolbar. deleting.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name You can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name: • • sites microwave links.

For information. From the Find list. about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of the status bar (see Figure 1. Note: To remove the point icon ( ). choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link Vector 3.e. see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73. 1. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. 4. Note: You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it. Enter the name of the object in the Named box. 2.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information Atoll displays the following information. Enter the x and y coordinates of the point. or in the clutter classes).Chapter 1: The Working Environment To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar: 1. select it and then select Delete from the context menu.3. using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tab of the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 73 . You can use an asterisk as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5. including sites that are presently filtered out. From the Find list. Click OK. non-numeric) property: • • • sites microwave links vectors. 3. select the Include all the sites in the search (filtered or not) check box. Atoll selects the object and centres it in the map window.45): • • • • the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system) the altitude (as defined in the DTM) the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties) the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file..3. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link 3. You can use an asterisk ("*")as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* *X names which contain X names which start with X names which end with X 4. The Location Finder dialogue appears. choose Point. Press ENTER. To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder: 1. If you wish to search all the sites in the search.8. select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. Atoll marks the point ( ) and centres it in the map window.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property You can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i. The Location Finder dialogue appears. 1. if available. Click OK.3 Searching for a Point on the Map You can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder.8. Atoll selects the site and centres it in the map window. ) on the toolbar. Under Criteria. 1. 4. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar. Note: You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder. To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder: 1. Click the Location Finder button ( 2.8. 2. From the Find list.

1.6 Using Icons from the Toolbar You can access many commands in Atoll by clicking its icon on the toolbar. see the Administrator Manual. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys (see "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75). 3. 4. You can also automatically generate log files for each Atoll session and select the level of information displayed in the Event viewer. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. If the Event Viewer is not displayed. as well as the progress of calculations.Atoll User Manual X-Y coordinates Altitude (from DTM) Clutter class Figure 1. The context menu appears. and error ( ) messages. The selected events are saved in the text file. enter a File name.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer Atoll displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. 2. select View > Event Viewer to display it. 5. The Event Viewer displays information ( ). Right-click the select event(s). warning ( ). 6.45: Information displayed in the status bar 1. For more information about these settings. Click and drag to select several events. Move the map window (CTRL+D) 74 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Save As. Click OK. The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below: • In the Standard toolbar Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N) Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O) Save the current document (CTRL+S) Cut the selected data (CTRL+X) Copy the selected data (CTRL+C) Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V) Undo the last modification (CTRL + Z) Redo the previous undone modification (CTRL + Y) Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P) Preview the current window before printing (table or map) (CTRL+P) Open the About Atoll dialogue • In the Map toolbar Select area Refresh display of map and folders (F5) Disable zooming and panning tools.8. To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file: 1.8. In the Save As dialogue. The Save As dialogue appears. and select a file type from the Save as type list. You can save the information displayed in the Event Viewer in a log file. select a destination folder.

• In the Vector Edition toolbar Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab) Select the vector layer to edit Draw a new polygon Draw a new rectangle Draw a new line Draw points Merge several vector polygons Cut out areas in polygons Create new polygon from overlapping areas Split one polygon along the drawn lines. see "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 75 .7 Using Shortcuts in Atoll Atoll provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly. Create a new multipoint microwave link. giving a short description.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Map scale currently used Previous/Next view (zoom and location) Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+R) Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W) Turn on tool tips Measure distances on the map Location finder Display a point-to-point profile • In the Microwave link toolbar Create a new microwave link. Currently selected microwave link model Activate the microwave link profile analysis window Show or hide victim and interferer links Show or hide site parities Stop the calculations in progress • In the Search toolbar Centre site in the map window. Note: When you place the cursor over an icon. The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon. a tool tip appears.8. 1. Create a new multi-hop microwave link.

click ) ) ) ) ) • CTRL+S: Save the current active document (in the toolbar. Links. click ) ) ALT+F8: Open the Add-ins and Macros dialogue F3: Select the Find Site tool. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder to a text file. click CTRL+D: In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells In the map window: Move the map window (in the toolbar. click ) ) ) CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification (in the toolbar. click CTRL+A: Select all records in a table CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (in the toolbar. Links. click CTRL+–: Zoom out on the map (in the toolbar. CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (in the toolbar. For more information. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. click ) ) and click the map) and right-click the map) CTRL+E: Export the table of the selected Sites.Atoll User Manual • Using the CTRL key: CTRL++: Zoom in on the map (in the toolbar. click CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (in the toolbar. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. click ) ) Using the ALT key: ALT+ ALT+ ←: Previous zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. click CTRL+SHIFT+N: Create a new document from an existing database CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (in the toolbar. click CTRL+P: Print the current window (in the toolbar. click CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (in the toolbar. Multi-Hops. CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table CTRL+I: Import the table of the selected Sites. 76 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . click →: Next zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select ) • Using the Function Keys - Tip: Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the underlined letter in the menu or command name. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder from a text file. click CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification (in the toolbar. click CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (in the toolbar. click CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (in the toolbar. Multi-Hops. For more information.

Chapter 2 Starting an Atoll Project .

Atoll User Manual 78 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Working with a database allows several users to share the same data while at the same time managing data consistency. Microwave data: frequency bands. Atoll can work with several common databases. you can modify the network parameters to meet your particular needs. The actual templates supplied depend on the modules included with your Atoll installation. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document (see "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81). the objects that are available are appropriate for the technology. and other equipment. You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customised with. For more information onmicrowave data. the database you connect to has been created with the technology and data you need.2. 2. DTM. 2. clutter heights.2. this template is provided to enable you to create a project of only microwave radio links. it may happen that one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. UMTS HSPA. Atoll is delivered with a template for each technology you will be planning for. Because Atoll can work with linked geographic data files. as part of a complete mobile telecommunications network. you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for the technology you are using. For more information on geographic data. For information on creating a document from a template. As well. etc. you can create the Atoll document.1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project For every microwave-planning project you must assemble the information necessary: • • • Microwave equipment: sites. see "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project". for example.1 Templates Available Depending on your configuration of Atoll.2 Creating an Atoll Document Whatever the radio technology you will be modelling. etc. microwave radio links. For example. 2. and LTE. see the technology-specific chapters. Atoll has a template for each technology you will be planning for. Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology. Once you have started your new Atoll project. In this chapter. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template. • From an existing database: When you create a new Atoll document from a database. or you can open it from the Open dialogue.1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template You can create a new Atoll document from a template. making the changes necessary to meet your own needs and then saving it as a new template. you can select it from the File menu if it is one of the last projects you have worked on. technology-specific parameters. In this section. Once the necessary data have been assembled. depending on the database containing the data. population maps. For more information on equipment. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 79. the following are explained: • • "Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project" on page 79 "Creating an Atoll Document" on page 79. CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. TD-SCDMATD-SCDMATD-SCDMA • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 79 . Once you have selected the appropriate template for your microwave-planning project. However. antennas. When you open an existing project. the tabs in the transmitter Properties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project.1. see the technology-specific chapters. For information on starting a document from a database. Several templates are supplied with Atoll: GPS GPRS EGPRS. For example. Atoll enables you to find the file and repair the link. coordinate systems. from any technology template. WiMAX. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2 Starting an Atoll Project When you want to start a new project. The exact procedure for creating a new Atoll document from a database differs. the following templates are available: • Microwave Radio Links: Atoll allows you to model microwave radio links. UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRX are only available in GSM-TDMA documents. you create an Atoll document in one of two ways: • From a document template: You can create a new Atoll document from a template. Geographic data: clutter classes. certain geo data or antennas. the following are explained: • • • "Templates Available" on page 79 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80 "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81 2.

among other UMTSUMTS-specific elements.2.1. 80 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .48: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a template. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS HSPA HSPA radio-planning project. Figure 2. with. These can be modified or replaced. Figure 2.49 appears.47 and Figure 2. folders for UMTS HSPA HSPA parameters and UMTS HSPA HSPA simulations. The dialogue in Figure 2.48 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document. respectively. the document is not connected to a database.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template To create a new document from a template: 1.47: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2.46: New Atoll document based on a template Figure 2. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK.Atoll User Manual 2. Select File > New > From a Document Template. To verify whether the document is connected to a database: • Select File > Database > Connection Properties.46 shows a new Atoll document based on the UMTS HSPA HSPA template. Atoll creates a new document based on the template selected. 2. Figure 2. The Antennas folder is expanded to show the UMTSUMTS-compatible antennas suggested by Atoll. The Project Templates dialogue appears.

the following are explained: • • • "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81 "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82 "Setting Measurement Units" on page 82 2. the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. This projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south. yard. the same coordinate system is used for both. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 81 . P. Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey. site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds). The projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter. Atoll distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display. Snyder.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2. The map shows the French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system (coordinates in metres). You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automatically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map.. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document. By choosing a specific display system. 1982. area or shape) which is to be shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics. but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system).2.C. Two projection systems are widely used: • The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually secant at one or two standard parallels. such as basic measurement units. In this section. thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance.49: An Atoll document based on a template is not connected to a database 2. In Figure 2. The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic data files. 2nd Edition. a database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. Atoll has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references. D. you define the two coordinate systems for each Atoll document: the projection coordinate system and the display coordinate system. you can see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system. but you must set projection and display coordinate systems. You can accept the default values for some parameters. • A geographic system is not a projection. thus. direction. A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet.50.2. The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections. By default. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that lay primarily east to west.1. or he must compromise on several characteristics1.1 Projection and Display Coordinate Systems In Atoll.3.3 Defining a New Atoll Document Once you have created a new Atoll document as explained in "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80.. On the other hand. This projection cannot be done without distortion. United States Government Printing Office. Washington. the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. etc. The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator).). 1.1. John. 313 pages. scale.

Atoll sets certain measurement units for reception.3 Selecting the Degree Display Format Atoll can display longitude and latitude in four different formats. Select Tools > Options. or you can change them using the Options dialogue.2. The Coordinate Sys- 3. For the projection system. transmission.93914 To change the degree display format: 1.3. 6. If not. 82 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . to step 5. Tip: If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favourites by clicking Add to Favourites.93914N +26. you must convert them to a single cartographic system.9sN 26.9’’N 26d56m29. For the display system. By default. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue. 4. You can accept these default measurement units. by default. Click OK. Select Tools > Options.3. ) to the right of the Projection field. 3.1. but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish. click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Display field and repeat step 3. The Options dialogue appears. The Options dialogue appears. 2.2 Setting a Coordinate System Because you are working with maps. 5. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display.1. projection and display coordinate systems are the same. 2.50: NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system used with WGS 72 system Notes: All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. only cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. distance.1. For example: • • • • 26°56’29.2. select a catalogue from the Find in list.4 Setting Measurement Units When you create a new Atoll document. in the Display field as well. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and. On the Coordinates tab. and offset to internal defaults. 2.3. select the format from the Degree Format list. both cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. you must set a coordinate system for your Atoll document. 2. height. 2. On the Coordinates tab. Note: The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems.2. click the Browse button ( tems dialogue appears.Atoll User Manual Figure 2. Click OK. Select a coordinate system from the list. To define the coordinate system: 1.

Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of the network. 2. the Atoll administrator can manage all the data shared by all the individual Atoll users or groups of users. 2. so as to minimise the size of the Atoll file. modified. and updated by the Atoll users and the administrator.e. work simultaneously on given parts of a single. usually store these modifications locally. It is initiated through the central Atoll project by the administrator. they are stored externally. connected over a network: • A central Atoll project: The central Atoll project can only be accessed. modified or deleted records. 2. users can modify their projects. for example.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment A multi-user environment is one where a number of users. Consequently. thus ensuring access to the database by other users.. When you create a new Atoll document from a database. Click OK. large (may be nation-wide) network. worked on.2. can be detected and resolved. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 83 . When you work on a document created from a database. Users who modify geographic data locally.1 The Atoll Multi-User Environment An Atoll multi-user environment consists of the following elements. and updated by the Atoll administrator. The connection to the reference database is reactivated only when necessary. For example. Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central Atoll project and are then accessed. you are working on data that you are sharing with other users. In this section. Through this central Atoll project. the following are explained: • • • • • "The Atoll Multi-User Environment" on page 83 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84 "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 "Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database" on page 86 "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. On the Units tab. Since geographic data files are usually large. Atoll loads the data to which you have rights from database into your new document and then disconnects it from the database. or groups of users. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users. refresh their projects from the data stored in the database. there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document. when you archive your changes to the database.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project To set the measurement units: 1. since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users. load only the required part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file. • - • User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon and managed by each user. select the desired unit for the following measurements: Reception Transmission Distance Height and offset 3. i. The Options dialogue appears. User documents are Atoll files which are connected to the central database. and archive their modifications in the database. Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fast access connection. editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects. and have access to the shared path loss matrices folder. the changes you have made may occasionally interfere with changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict. they are usually linked to an Atoll file.2. Select Tools > Options. Once the database is in place.2. and is then subdivided into sections on which users or groups of users can work simultaneously. The shared data are mainly of the following three types: The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the Atoll user documents. modified. for example). This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose. for example.

see the Administrator Manual. Click OK. 2. Note: Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load or which site list to load. Depending on the type of the database.51: Components of Multi-user Environments Note: For information on creating and maintaining the database. Atoll loads the database into a new Atoll document.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database When you create a new document from a database.2. you must connect to the database.2. 84 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 2. The Data to Load dialogue appears. Password.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.2. A new connection with the database will be created only when necessary. Select File > New > From an Existing Database. 3. Atoll can work with the following databases: • • • • • Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Microsoft Data Link files The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data: • • "Connecting to a Database" on page 84. Once connected.2.1 Connecting to a Database To create a new document from a database: 1. a dialogue may appear where you can enter your User Name. select the option corresponding to the type of your database. The Open from a Database dialogue appears. In the Files of type list. The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another. in order to allow other users access to the database. Then the connected is interrupted. and Server. An example of a new Atoll document created from a database is shown in: • "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 2. allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85).2. "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85.

The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project.2.2 Selecting the Data to Load From the Database When you create a new document from a database.53 shows a new Atoll document based created from a database.2. rightclicking on any site.55 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document.2. Figure 2.2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 85 .53: New Atoll document opened from a database Note: The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window. This is because the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin. If you load the intra-technology or the inter-technology neighbour list.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. Site List. Figure 2.54 and Figure 2. respectively. Atoll will also load the associated exceptional pairs table. such as sites. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a document created from a database can have additional data. and Neighbour to load. and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu. You can select which Project.3 Working With a Document on a Database Figure 2. You can re-centre the document on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder.52: Selecting the data to load 2. Figure 2. you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create the document in the Data to load dialogue. These can be modified or replaced.2. unlike a document created from a template. Custom Fields Groups.

it will be become a stand-alone document and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database. The Refresh dialogue appears. the Archive dialogue appears.55: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a database. Caution: If you disconnect your document from the database. If you chose Archive your changes in the database.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database As you are working on your document.56). you can do one of the following if you have modified your document but have not yet saved those changes in the database: Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server instead of refreshing your document from the server. Select File > Database > Connection Properties.56: The Database Connection dialogue 2. For information on using the Archive dialogue. Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have made and start over from the point of the last archive to the database. 86 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you should refresh your document frequently as well.2. see "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. Atoll proceeds without asking for confirmation. other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data. - Modify your connection to the database. Select File > Database > Refresh From the Database. To refresh an Atoll document from the database: 1. you can view the characteristics of the database connection. In the dialogue. You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database. How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated. 2. Notes: • • If you chose Refresh unmodified data only or Cancel your changes and reload database. The Database Connection dialogue appears (see Figure 2.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.2. in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data. To view the characteristics of the database connection: 1.54: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2. If the database is updated frequently. Figure 2. 2. You can now: Disconnect your document from the database. Refresh unmodified data only: This option allows you to refresh from the database only those items that you have not modified in your document.

4. 2.2. However. The report lists all the modifications (deletions.57). when you archive your changes. cells. In this section. to refresh.2. and opens it. allowing you to create a new Atoll document with the given antennas. 2.2. etc.5. 2. The Atoll archiving process is flexible. the following are explained: • • • "Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 87 "Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 87 "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. Atoll shows you all modifications that will be archived and. you should from time to time archive the modifications you have made to the data on the database. Figure 2. For example. For information on managing conflicts. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 87 . Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. Intra-technology Neighbours and Inter-technology Neighbours. you can archive only some of them or even undo modifications you have made locally. other users might have modified some of the same data and. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed. because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas. You can then rename the file and save it where you wish.57: The Archive dialogue 3. Atoll will inform you of the possible conflicts and help you resolve them. if you wish.2. Atoll creates a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format in the temporary files system folder. The document is refreshed according to the selected options. For example. you can select the neighbour lists. In the Archive dialogue. when you are archiving. additions. You can archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifications. Under Take into account. the number of other users using the database who may benefit from your modifications. Under Modifications Since the Last Refresh.1 Archiving All Modifications in the Database To archive all your modifications in the database: 1. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. As well. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given to you. transmitters.5. 5. and updates) that were stored in the database since the last time you refreshed or opened your document. If you selected to generate a report.2. When you are finished archiving. Click OK.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database Atoll allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. 4.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 3. you can generate a report for the refresh process. you can have read access to the antennas table. 2. How frequently you should archive your document depends on several factors: the amount and size of changes you make. and neighbours. you will not be able to archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database When you are working on an Atoll document that is attached to a database. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology you are working with. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. click Close.2. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. Occasionally. in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project. the site-related data are: sites.

Atoll User Manual To archive only the site-related data in the database: 1. However. and continues with the next table. There are two different types of data conflicts: On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended.5. the archiving process stops.59). click Close. 2. Atoll allows you to resolve data conflicts. Abort: If you click Abort. 88 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or wait until the end of the archive process. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed. with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2. select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve. archives all other modifications in the table. When Atoll finds a conflict. if conflicts are found in other tables. Atoll will warn you with the Database Transfer Error dialogue again. this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data.58. Ignore All: If you click Ignore All. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. 3. To resolve data conflicts one by one: 1.58: Conflict warning You have three options: • Ignore: If you click Ignore. Atoll ignores all items causing conflicts in all tables being archived. When the second user attempts to archive his changes. For information on managing conflicts. A conflict is caused only by differences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current Atoll document. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. • • Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately. You can attempt to resolve conflicts before restarting the archiving process. The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears.2. you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values column. and archives all other modifications. The Archive dialogue appears. it displays the warning shown in Figure 2. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88.2. When you are finished archiving. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. 4. In the Conflict in Changes dialogue. Atoll ignores items causing conflicts in the table being archived.3 Resolving Data Conflicts Atoll enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database for other users. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. However. the procedure to resolve the conflict is the same. Atoll warns him that the data have been changed since he last refreshed the data and that there is a conflict. 2. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column. In the Archive dialogue. Figure 2.

2. No: Select No to overwrite the modifications made by other users in the database with the values from your document. Important: You should only resolve all the data conflicts when you are certain about the modifications. select any conflict and click Resolve All. To resolve all the data conflicts: 1. clear the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel.59: The Conflict in Changes dialogue If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document. Atoll displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the database (see Figure 2. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue.60). overwriting the value there. No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue.60: Conflict on a deleted record Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications in the database. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 89 . For information. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. Your modification will be written to the database. Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain unchanged.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2.61). 2.61: Resolving all the data conflicts simultaneously Yes: Select Yes to accept all the modifications made by other users in the database and update your document with values from the database. Atoll displays a message explaining how Resolve All works (see Figure 2. Select one of the following: Figure 2. Select one of the following: Figure 2. thereby recreating the deleted record. If you want to accept the value of the field in the database. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. - - On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. select the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive.

This also improves memory management because each instance of Atoll has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems. Select the Activate automatic backup check box. Select File > Configure Automatic Backup. Atoll skips the backup once. i. Atoll creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. Atoll prompts you each time before backing up the document. Consequently. the timer is reset to 0. Therefore.62). the automatic backup is delayed until the calculations have ended. In this section. For example. Figure 2. you should set a correspondingly larger interval between backups when working with large documents in order to optimise the process. To configure automatic backup: 1.e. Atoll automatically creates a backup for every document open. If you click Cancel.ini file. 4. these documents will use the same 2 GB memory pool. Atoll proceeds to back up all open documents. 90 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can optimise the process by opening large documents in separate Atoll sessions. 2. The Automatic Backup Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 2.62: Automatic backup configuration dialogue 2. For more information. the following are explained: • • "Configuring Automatic Backup" on page 90 "Recovering a Backup" on page 91. If you save the original document manually.bak" in the same folder as the original document. see the Administrator Manual. If you open them in two different Atoll sessions.63). Figure 2. in minutes. if you have a lot of documents open. Note: It can take a long time to back up large documents. If you click OK. Atoll displays a message in the Event Viewer every time a backup file is updated. each document will have its own 2 GB allocated memory. Select the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box if you want Atoll to ask you before saving the back up of your file every time (see Figure 2. Enter a time interval.atl. coverage predictions or simulations. 4 GB under 64-bit operating systems) memory allocation. Once you have saved the document. If you open two large documents in the same Atoll session.3..3 Making a Backup of Your Document Atoll can create and automatically update backups of documents you are working on. If you are performing calculations.63: Automatic backup prompt The automatic backup timer is stopped while the prompt is displayed. The timer starts again once the calculations are over. instead of in the same Atoll session. between consecutive backups in the Automatically save backups every text box. When you have activated automatic backup." Atoll will create a backup file called "filename. this operation can take a long time. 5. You can also configure Atoll to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an option in the atoll. 3. Click OK.atl. However.Atoll User Manual 2. for a document named "filename. You can define the update interval each time you start Atoll. If you selected the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box.1 Configuring Automatic Backup You can set up automatic backup for each Atoll session.

Select the ZIP file that contains the ATL file and linked geographic data files. and it is not feasible to embed these files in an ATL file due to file size. If the original document was named "filename." the backup document will be in the same folder and will be called "filename." Important: If you just remove the BAK extension. or by creating a compressed archive (ZIP file) containing the ATL file and all geographic data linked to the Atoll document.3. 3.dbf file corresponding to the extended path loss matrices. This folder contains subfolders with the same names as the folders on the Geo tab. The Save As dialogue appears. measurement data.dbf files are stored in the archive because they are needed when reopening the archive in Atoll. For example. Select the folder where you want to extract the contents of the ZIP file. Select File > Save to Zip.). If the geographic data files linked to the document are located on a remote computer. your backup file will have the same file name as the original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file.atl. such as a file server over a network. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 91 . simulation results.atl. 2. Open the renamed backup document in Atoll. 2.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. Select the folder where the created archive is to be stored.atl. A "Geo" folder with all the linked geographic data available on the Geo tab of the Explorer window for the Atoll document. 5. Click Open. coverage predictions. Atoll extracts all the files from the archive to the selected folder. more useful to make a project portable by creating an archive that contains the ATL and all geographic data files. Rename the document and remove the BAK extension. and performance reasons. navigate to the folder containing your original Atoll document and its backup. geographic data files are stored on a common file server and are linked to the ATL documents of different users over a network. Atoll creates a ZIP file containing: A copy of the ATL file with the same name as the name of the archive (ZIP file). and data present within folders on the Geo tab are stored inside their respective folders. To make an archive containing the ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. geographic data. you could change the name to "filename-backup.2 Recovering a Backup You can easily recover your backup document and open it in Atoll just like any other Atoll document.4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects You can create portable Atoll documents in two ways: • • by embedding all the geographic data in the ATL file. you can open it directly from Atoll without first having to extract it using another tool. Therefore. The Open dialogue appears. Once the portable archive is created. The ATL file added to the archive contains all the data that might be embedded in it (path loss matrices. 4. To recover your backup document: 1.bak". A ". Select File > Open from Zip. and select "Zip Files (*. To open an archive containing an ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. Click OK. It is. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the backup was saved. If necessary. etc.zip)" from the Save as type list. it is safer to give a new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is most recent. The pathloss. enter a File name for the archive to be created. therefore. 3. it opens the extracted ATL file.losses" folder containing a pathloss. Once Atoll has finished extracting files from the archive. they are first copied to the local computer in the Windows’ temporary files folder and then added to the archive. memory consumption. Externally stored path loss matrices are not added to the archive because they are not necessary for making a portable document because they can be recalculated based on the network and geographic data in the ATL file. The Browse For Folder dialogue appears. 2. 2. Atoll lets you make an archive containing the ATL file and all geographic data directly from the File menu. Using Windows Explorer. it creates the subfolders required for extracting the contents of the Geo folder. Often these geographic data files are quite large.dbf file and a LowRes subfolder which contains the pathloss. In most working environments. Geographic data that are found outside folders on the Geo tab are stored in files under the Geo folder. Geographic data extracted from the archive are linked to the ATL file.

92 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . such as WinZip or WinRAR. The highest compression level is used when creating the archive. installed on the computer for this feature.Atoll User Manual Notes: • • You do not need to have a compression utility.

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data .

Atoll User Manual 94 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

DTM. such as clutter classes. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 95 . either by transferring them to the Data tab. Atoll also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type. Once you have imported a file into the Atoll document. and Points" on page 96 "Scanned Images" on page 96 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 96 Digital Terrain Model The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. Geographic data used for display purposes: In this section. 3. clutter heights. discrete values. recompact the file. The Geo tab of the Atoll Explorer window has folders for the commonly used data types. You can also create raster-based geographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes. deciding the priority of data files with different information or different resolutions. create new geographic data. can be used to give more realistic calculations. or points. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data that you can import or create. and Points" on page 106 "Scanned Images" on page 107 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108 "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109 "Editing Geographic Data" on page 113 "Saving Geographic Data" on page 116. lines. raster polygons. lines. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can add contours.1 Geographic Data Types An Atoll document can contain several different geographic data types. or by importing them directly to the Data tab. The different geographic data types play different roles in the Atoll document: • Geographic data used in propagation calculation: • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Images from web map services (WMS) Contours. or modify existing data. through the process of saving them. and points representing. Lines. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagation model during computations. define how the geo data will be displayed. Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. clutter heights. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab. Therefore. You can export most geo data objects (for example. railways. are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study. Other types such as scanned images. clutter classes. the following data types are described: • • • • • • "Digital Terrain Model" on page 95 "Clutter Classes" on page 95 "Clutter Heights" on page 96 "Contours. you can decide in which folder it goes.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3 Managing Geographic Data Several different geographic data types are used in an Atoll document. You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files. choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. You can also create your own data type by importing a file and defining what data is to be used. you can edit the data. or regions. for example. When you import a geo data file into Atoll. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value. Some data types. roads. Atoll also allows you to save changes you make to geo data objects back to the original files. scanned images. or vector layers) for use in other Atoll documents or in other applications. This enables you to update the original files and. You can also create and edit geographic data. The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Geographic Data Types" on page 95 "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96 "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96 "Clutter Classes" on page 103 "Clutter Heights" on page 106 "Digital Terrain Models" on page 103 "Contours. clutter classes. Atoll supports a wide range of file formats for geographic data files. Lines.

IST (1 to 24-bit). Planet. Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. and TAB. Atoll recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit). MIF. GRC Vertical Mapper (8-bit). and Erdas Imagine (8-bit) Vector data files in the following formats: AGD. BIL (8-bit). Planet. BMP (16-bit). GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit). BIL (16-bit). Erdas Imagine (16-bit). or points. and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). DFX. JPEG 2000 (16-bit). Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. As explained in "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96. Geoclimatic files in the following formats: AGD. BIL (8 or 16-bit). The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. Clutter heights can also be defined by a separate clutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 96).3 Importing Geo Data Files You can import the geographic data you need into the current Atoll document. SHP. Note: The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. JPEG 2000 (1 to 24-bit).. IST (8 or 16-bit). Lines. for example. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map. Contours. and refractivity. Planet. Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit). vapour density. DFX. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. and ECW (8 or 24-bit) JPEG 2000 (16-bit). and Points Atoll supports contours. AGD. Contours can also be used to create filtering polygons or computation or focus zones. You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value. BMP (8-bit). Planet. Planet. Traffic Data Maps Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. • • 3. Planet. BMP (8-bit). however. SHP. SHP. DXF. JPEG 2000 (8-bit). Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD. GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit).Atoll User Manual Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. and points to represent polygons such as regions. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. clutter altitude is taken from the clutter height map. BMP (1 to 24-bit). MIF. BMP (8-bit). IST (16-bit). in a clutter height file. they have no effect on calculations. Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. road maps or satellite images. and TAB. GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are used only for display. temperature. Caution: All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system. DXF. When you import a new geo data file. When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map. IST (8 or 16-bit). Planet. Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit).2 Supported Geographic Data Formats Atoll supports the following geographic data formats: • • • • • • DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). discrete values. MIF. and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit). it is possible to have different heights within a single clutter class. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). and TAB. see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. 3. BIL (8 or 16-bit). Traffic data maps are used for network capacity analyses. SHP. IST (8-bit). and TAB. Clutter height maps can offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because. GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). lines. MIF. You can 96 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For information on defining the height per clutter class. JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. or lines such as roads or coastlines. BIL (1 to 24-bit). JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit).

To import a geographic data file in a raster format: 1.64). f. select the Embed in Document check box.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the Atoll document itself. Under Clutter Distribution. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98. Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list. c. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. For information on exporting the paths of your document’s files or to import the path from another document using user configuration files. 3. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file. The total percentages must equal 100. Tip: You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. the traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears: a. 5. By default. 4. enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. choose one of the following options: DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list. enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. providing that the geo data files are of the same type. Click Open. Under Services (%). The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document.3. b. Select the geo data file you want to import. When you import a traffic data map. The Open dialogue appears. Click Import. The format is automatically recognized and Atoll presents you with the appropriate dialogue. The total percentages must equal 100. Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list. select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink. or only in the Uplink.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data embed geo data files in the Atoll document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). Under Terminals (%). This section explains the following: • • • • • • "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97 "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98 "Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data" on page 99 "Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 101 "Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 102 "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. The total percentages must equal 100. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. 2. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using Atoll’s user configuration files. e. For information on embedding files. Under Mobilities (%). The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. For UMTS and CDMA. Click OK. Note: If the Vector Import dialogue appears. enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 97 . You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. d. enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. only in the Downlink. Select File > Import.

Population: ii. 2.66). Select Population from the Import to list. Select the geo data file you want to import.66: Population values (number of inhabitants per item – polygon/road/point) 98 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre for polygons. To import a vector-format geographic data file: 1. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing.64: Importing a clutter class file 3. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. 3.65: Population density (number of inhabitants/km²) Figure 3. go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97. choose one of the following options: Vector Data: i.Atoll User Manual Figure 3. iii. Under Fields to be imported. providing that the geo data files are of the same type.65 and Figure 3. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. Figure 3. The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Select Geo from the Import to list. and the second list lets you select whether the attribute corresponds to population density or to a number of inhabitants. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file. Click Open. Note: If the File Import dialogue appears. the first list contains the attributes of the population vector data file that you are importing. Select File > Import.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File When you import geo data files in vector format. their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the Atoll document. or number of inhabitants per kilometre for lines) or a Value (number of inhabitants) (see Figure 3. The Open dialogue appears.67). You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file.3.

please refer to the Administrator Manual.3. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. Atoll can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. 5. defined in the corresponding MIF/PRJ files. such as a DTM or clutter heights. Figure 3.3. select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value from the second list. This section explains the following: • • "Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type" on page 99 "Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database" on page 100. you can import each type of geo data separately. Rectangles are interpreted as polygons.68). Select File > Import.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Geoclimatic File: i.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data MSI Planet® geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files. 2. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Click Import. by importing several index files. Under Fields to be imported. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The Open dialogue appears. Select Geoclimatic Parameters from the Import to list. For more information about defining the mapping between coordinate systems. When you import MSI Planet® geo data. select the Embed in Document check box. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. 3.3. when you import a vector file. By default. To import one type of MSI Planet® geo data: 1. You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vector files. The index file is in ASCII text format and contains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file.67: Vector Import dialogue Notes: • • You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB). by importing the corresponding index file. For information on embedding files. 3. ii. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. This way. and Atoll.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type When you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet® geo data. or you can import several MSI Planet® geo data files at the same time. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 99 . you import the index file containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data. 4.

d. Select the corresponding check box b.3. c. Select the MSI Planet® index file and click Open. 4. Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data in the current Atoll document. 2. To import the MSI Planet® geo database: 1. 100 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .3. The Open dialogue appears. The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (see Figure 3. click OK. 4. For each type of data that you want to import: a. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears.Atoll User Manual Figure 3. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import. The data is imported into the current Atoll document.69: Importing an MSI Planet® database 3. If you want to embed the data. Select "Planet® database" from the Files of Type list.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database You can import all available MSI Planet® geo data at the same time by importing all index files. The path and name of the file appears in the corresponding field of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue. click . Figure 3.69). To locate the MSI Planet® index file. 3. select the Embed check box.68: Importing an MSI Planet® index file 3. Click OK to import the geo data into the current Atoll document.

or the image group.ini file.70 on page 101). Arrange the order in which you want the images to appear by selecting each image in the right pane and clicking to move it towards the top or to move it toward the bottom. To import a geographic data file from a web map service: 1. Geographic Coordinates: The geographic coordinates are the WMS data are given. you can arrange them by placing on top the image that is the most important. you can place the least transparent image towards the bottom so that the other images imported at the same time remain visible.3. The images will be imported as a single object and their appearance will depend on the order you define here. 11. Click for each image you want to import. 4. The following information is given about the imported WMS data: Data Types: "Image or Scan" is selected. such as roads. For information on defining these entries. The image is imported by reference into the Atoll document. All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as that used by the Atoll document itself. 6. 8. see the Administrator Manual.. The image must be in TIF format. it can not be embedded. Figure 3. Note: You can remove an image or group of images from the images to be imported by selecting it in the right pane and clicking .Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3.70: The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue 5. If desired. Atoll connects to the URL of the WMS server and displays the information available along with a description of the service (Figure 3. Click Import. Click the Connect button. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 101 . 9. 10. Before you import them. The files you want to import appear in the right pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. From the Files of Type list. a group preceded by an Expand button ( ). Note: The list of WMS servers that appears in the Server URL list are defined by entries in the atoll. Or. select Connection to a Web Map Services server. 2. Before importing an image from a WMS server. i. the Lambert Conformal-Conic or the Universal Transverse Mercator projection) can be imported.e. you must ensure that the coordinate system used in your document is the same projection system supported by the server. The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue appears. The image will be referenced in the document. You can not embed a WMS image in your document. The Web Map Import dialogue appears. you can modify this name.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File You can import raster images from a Web Map Service (WMS) server into your Atoll document. 3. All images imported at the same time are imported as a single image. Only WMS data mapped with a projection system (for example. Select the URL of the WMS server from the Server URL list or enter it directly. Select File > Import. The Name suggested is the name of the lowest layer to be imported. Select either the image you want to import. The Open dialogue appears. In the left pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. navigate to the item you want to import by clicking the Expand button ( ) to open each level. 7.

Note: If you want to import your file to the Data tab. 3. Atoll imports the group as a single object. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file.3. From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue). choose to embed the geo data file in your Atoll document. The next time you open an Atoll document with the linked geo data file. Distributed calculations can not work with embedded geo data files. the geo data file is moved. When you import the next geo data file. Atoll creates a link to the file. when you import scanned images and contours. their own individual display settings. When the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. You can. You can not modify this object. Select the geo data file and click Open. 3. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. they appear directly on the Geo tab. when you import a geo data file. and points into folders as well. are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder. such as clutter classes. If the file to be imported is a raster file. For information.71. Other data files. Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. Select File > Import. when you import a geo data file. Select Properties from the context menu. you can select New folder in Data. you must link your geo data files.64). see the Administrator Manual. They retain. You can. these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. The Open dialogue appears. the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 102 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . group scanned images and contours. 4. Once grouped. the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level. The geo data file is now embedded in the current Atoll document. select New folder in Geo. If you want to remove one of the images or add another one you will go through the import process again. If. Atoll creates a link to the file. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document. and points.3. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. it is saved as part of the document. the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. see the Administrator Manual. To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current Atoll document: 1. If the file to be imported is a vector file. however. Important: If you are using distributed calculations. Note: You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab. Click OK.6 Embedding Geographic Data By default. 3. Click Import. The New Folder dialogue appears.Atoll User Manual If you had selected more than one image or an image group.67). Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.3. To create a new geo data folder when importing: 1. lines. When Atoll is linked to a geo data file. For more information. either raster or vector. lines. Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK. 3. however. 2. Atoll cannot find the file and displays the error message shown in Figure 3. either when you import it or later. 4. you can import it directly into the new folder. however. 5. 3. You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import. You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it. 5. Your file is imported into the newly created folder. or vice versa. however. 2. the link will be broken.5 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders By default. To embed a geo data file in the current Atoll document while you are importing: • Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box. Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer to Geo. Click Embed.7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File By default. 6.

select it and click OK. 6. Move the Relief slider towards Flat. To repair a broken link from within the Atoll document: 1.5 Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. The context menu appears. 3. however this height is only an average per class. Select Properties from the context menu. Browse to the geo data file.72). based on size. and type.71) appears. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. or DTM folder.4 Digital Terrain Models The Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level. 4. If the geo data file is in a folder.71: Missing shortcut To find the file yourself: • When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3. To manage the properties of the DTM: 1.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. 4.72: Problem with shortcut You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the Atoll document. click the Browse button to locate the geo data file. date. 2. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click on the geo data file whose link you want to repair. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. For information on clutter height maps. When it finds a possible match. Atoll automatically searches for the missing file as well. It searches for the nearest match. 3. Traffic. such as the Clutter Classes. 5. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM. to expand the 2. Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file. it informs you with a message (see Figure 3. or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. 3. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. click folder. click the Find button. The Properties dialogue appears. For information on Display tab settings. If the file corresponds to the source file: • Click Yes. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 103 . see "Clutter Heights" on page 106. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder. 3. if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to emphasise the differences in altitude. Figure 3.

1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes The clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. 6. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. it is the name that appears in tool tips and reports. This is an optional feature that must first be activated. you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document: For all Atoll documents: Model Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss. When a clutter class has a descriptive name. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file. see the Technical Reference Guide. JPEG 2000. 3. 104 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code. Indoor penetration losses depend on the clutter types as well as the operating frequency. In addition to the Display tab options described in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Click the Default Values tab. point analysis. propagation models which use the height information of clutter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map. 3. you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make Atoll use the values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. Important: If the Height field is left blank. contact support. When you import a clutter class file in BIL. TIF. To assign names to clutter classes: 1.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties The parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiver location. you can assign a descriptive name to each clutter class name. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. Atoll can automatically assign names to clutter classes if the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. 8. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue: To define clutter class properties: 1. To make it easier to work with clutter classes. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box. CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes and their corresponding names. Enter default values for each field. TD-SCDMA Note: - 7. 4. 5. You can define an additional indoor loss per frequency band used in the Frequency bands table in GSM GPRS EGPRS. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. or IMP format.5. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Even if there is a clutter classes map. Select Properties from the context menu. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. For information about each field. each clutter class display type has a visibility check box. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. 5.Atoll User Manual This section explains the following: • • • • • "Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 104 "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104 "Adding a Clutter Class" on page 105 "Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 105 "Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 105. 3. Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions.5. and Monte Carlo simulations. In the Name column. 2. 3. The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. and TD-SCDMA documents. see the descriptions in the previous step. Select Properties from the context menu. For more information. UMTS HSPA. 4. enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column. you can display or hide clutter class display types individually. If desired. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

To refresh the list of the clutter classes: 1. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current. Select Properties from the context menu. This information is also available in prediction reports. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 4. 3. 100 Sk  k © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 105 . Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. For information on modifying the clutter class map.5. To display the surface area covered by each clutter class: 1. if there is no focus or computation zone. On the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue in the new Atoll document. Select Statistics from the context menu. 7. Tip: You can copy the description table into a new Atoll document after importing the clutter classes file. The Statistics dialogue appears. 3. Click OK. 6. 2. Click OK. if you have imported two clutter class files and then deleted one of them. 3. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. press CTRL+V to paste the values in the table. displaying the surface area (Si in km²) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage (% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone. and step 6. Si % of I = ------------. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click Refresh. You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map.3 Adding a Clutter Class You can add a new clutter class to your document. For example. 4. at the bottom of the table. 3. see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114. Atoll removes the unused clutter classes from the list. if one exists. even if they are not used in the remaining file. you can refresh the list.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes Under certain circumstances. In the blank row marked with column. it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Code 6. Click OK.5.5. Atoll displays the surface area covered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class You can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. 5.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Note: Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent. Select Properties from the context menu. 2. 3. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 3. Atoll displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire document. 2. the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file. To copy the description table. 5. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 9. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. select the entire table by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C. To add a new clutter class to the your document: 1.

Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. For information on working with data tables.7 Contours. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. you can import or create vector objects such as contours. 2. Atoll can use additional information related to vectors as display parameters. The vector table appears. the following are explained: • • • "Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 106 "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 106 "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes. and points. In an Atoll document. for example. The context menu appears. The imported or created vectors are used primarily for display purposes.7. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. 3.6 Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM. In addition. Select Properties from the context menu. The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. Atoll uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagation models (the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model). Select Open Table from the context menu. 3. 2. When a clutter height file is available. 2. 4. and Points In Atoll. If no clutter height file exists. To manage the display of a vector layer: 1. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue appears. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. vector objects such as contours. In a clutter height file. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. The context menu appears. In this section. for display (in tool tips and in the status line). right-click the vector layer folder. Vector Layer Table All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer Imported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. and for CW measurements and test mobile data paths. 3. or computation or focus zones. For information on Display tab settings. To manage the properties of clutter heights: 1. When you import a vector file.7. with. The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in the status bar. To open the vector layer table: 1. 3. roads. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. and points are arranged in vector layers. a height is given for each point on the map.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer The properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the Properties dialogue. For information on using the display tab. Atoll adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file. but polygons can be used as filters. 106 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Right-click the Clutter Heights folder. Lines. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Right-click the vector layer. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracy because they allow more than one height per clutter class. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located.Atoll User Manual 3. Note: You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu. the height is given as an average per clutter class. 4. lines. Atoll uses the average clutter height per clutter class as defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104). lines. Atoll can read three-dimensional vector data.

8 Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. etc. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61. as specified when the file was imported. Click the Display tab. a Table tab. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. all objects on the Data tab. right-click the vector layer folder. Each line contains the following information. Deleting. remain visible in the map window. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. roads. Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Select Properties from the context menu. to ensure that certain geo data. and predictions. In this section. 3. Vector Layer Properties Dialogue The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab. To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer: 1. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer. Click the Table tab. When the a vector layer is embedded. For information on the Table tab. the coordinate system used is document’s. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63. the following are explained: • • "Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 107 "Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 108. see "Adding. or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. - 4. Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the Atoll document. see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109. Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer. XMAX: The end X coordinate. the coordinate system used is the file’s. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab In Atoll. as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 107 . For more information about display priority in Atoll. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and placing it above data such as predictions. YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file. To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window: 1. Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked. major geographical features.1 Importing Several Scanned Images You can import scanned images into the current Atoll document one at a time. The index file is a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line.. otherwise the file is described as embedded. The context menu appears. Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. 3. Format. Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the Atoll document. XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file. with its path relative to the current location of the index file. 3. You may wish. The following options are available: Name: The name of the vector layer. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). For information on filtering.They have no effect on calculations. for example. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. 3. with the information separated by a space: • • • • File name: The name of the file. and Records menus. such as transmitters. as specified when the file was embedded. For information on the Table tab. for example. For information on sorting. antennas. For more information on editing tables in Atoll.8. Click the General tab.7. 3. You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geo tab from the context menu. 2. 5. The context menu appears. You can rename the vector layer using this field.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit. 2. Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the file’s location has changed. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. and a Display tab. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. road maps or satellite images. however.

73: Scanned image Properties dialogue 3. Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. or Watermark from the list. allowing objects in lower layers to be visible.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images Because imported images cannot be modified. calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). 3. Select the Display tab and set the following options: Colour: Select either Automatic. Click Import. Figure 3. 0: The zero character ends the sequence. 2. Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text box. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. they have fewer display parameters than other object types. The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range. Select File > Import. Select Properties from the context menu. Select the index file and click Open.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0 nice2. Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white to be transparent. 4. 108 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click OK. 4.73). the scanned image is not displayed. the following are explained: • • "Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties" on page 109 "Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics" on page 109. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window 2. Shades of gray. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. To define the display properties of a scanned image: 1. temperature.9 Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. 3.Atoll User Manual • • YMAX: The end Y coordinate. In this section. vapour density. nice1. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3. XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0 3. and refractivity.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0 File name To import an index 1. Right-click the scanned image.64). 5. The context menu appears.8.

there are as many layers as imported objects. Click to expand the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. 2. To display the statistics of the geoclimatic data: 1. 3. Select Statistics from the context menu. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data There are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data: • The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether or not the object is displayed on the map. 6. Data on layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objects on the top layer. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one. You can select the parameter it corresponds to from the Parameters column. Each object is placed on a separate layer. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab of the Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) of a geoclimatic map. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. - 5. The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. The following tabs are available: Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part of the geoclimatic map. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Right-click any geoclimatic file in the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder.10. Thus. antennas. if the check box is cleared ( ). For information on using the display tab.1 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties To manage the properties of a geoclimatic map: 1. 3. If the check box. • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 109 . Deleting. Click the Table tab. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. the object is not displayed.9.2 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in the display properties (for information on defining value intervals. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table.9. It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab. For information on working with the Table tab. If the check box is selected ( ).10 Setting the Priority of Geo Data Atoll lists the imported DTM. and predictions. if there is no focus or computation zone. Note: Statistics are displayed only for visible data. is selected but shaded ( ). see "Adding. not all objects in the folder are displayed. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. 3. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column. For more information. the object is displayed. with the relevant data selected in the Field column. 4. Value interval is the only available display type. Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document. 2. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval. Select Properties from the context menu. 7.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. 3. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data file and scanned image. Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the geoclimatic map appears in the map window. such as transmitters.

such as transmitters. you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core. see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. and predictions. etc. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or different resolutions. Figure 3. For more information. An object is visible only in the map window if the scale.10. vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS. antennas. Atoll can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutter class file with the higher resolution. and traffic density folders. clutter heights. Population maps and custom geo data maps. Object folders. For example. for example. for example. can be transferred to the Data tab. In the map window. so that the object is not displayed on the map. In Figure 3. In this case. Vector geo data. In this way. RAILWAYS and AIRPORT). as displayed on the zoom toolbar. the DTM layer which is beneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations The priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display. remain visible in the map window For more information. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. major geographical features.) is the data from the top down. Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ). RIVERLAKE. when calculating coverage in an urban area. is within this range. For more information. The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes. both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules of calculation priority. see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23. the linear objects (ROADS. the DTM. and some object types. using the second file for all other calculations. Note: The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box ( ). you can ensure that certain vector geo data. and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area. where they can be placed over data such as predictions.Atoll User Manual Note: All objects on the Data tab. by placing the clutter class file for the downtown core over the file with the lower resolution. Therefore for each folder. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23. COASTLINE. DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. DTM. etc. The clutter class layer is visible in the area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). etc. you should place the objects with the best data at the top. MAJORROADS. are not visible. what is used is what is seen. The only cases where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for population data in reports. MAJORSTREETS. On the other hand. RIVERLAKE. it will still be taken into consideration for calculations. such as predictions. such as clutter classes. clutter classes.74. can contain more than one data object. Atoll takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higher levels. roads. clutter classes.. 110 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . however. where the density of users is higher. These are normally the objects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. and for custom geo data maps. In other words. When you make calculations in Atoll.74: Displaying Geo data layers 3.) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. • • The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects.

there are two imported maps: • • A clutter class map called “Clutter.75: Multi-layer management in calculations – two DTM maps representing different areas 3.2.76: Multi-layer management in calculations – Clutter and DTM maps representing the same area 3. Atoll will use both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. In both Case 1 and Case 2. there are two imported clutter classes maps: • • "Clutter 1" represents a large area with a resolution of 50 m. 3. the clutter class map is on top of the DTM map.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area In this example.10. Atoll will take all the data from both "DTM 1” and "DTM 2” into account. Atoll uses both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. the file order of the DTM files in the Explorer window does not matter because they do not overlap.” A DTM map called “DTM”. This area is also covered by "Clutter 1" In the case of two clutter class maps. Explorer window Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter DTM • DTM Case 2 DTM • DTM Clutter classes • Clutter Work space Figure 3.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data The following sections give several examples to better illustrate how data are used in Atoll: • • • "Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas" on page 111 "Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area" on page 111 "Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area" on page 111. in both Case 1 and Case 2.2. “DTM 2” represents a different area and has a resolution of 20 m. Atoll will therefore use the data in "Clutter 2" where it is available. In Case 2.10.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas In this example. and the data from "Clutter 1" everywhere that is covered by "Clutter 1" but not by © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 111 .3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area In this example. the DTM map is on top of the clutter class map. In this example. Explorer window Case 1 DTM • • Work space DTM 2 (20m) DTM 1 (50m) Case 2 DTM • • DTM 1 (50m) DTM 2 (20m) Figure 3. In Case 1. there are two imported DTM files: • • "DTM 1” represents a given area and has a resolution of 50 m. In Case 1. "Clutter 2" represents a smaller area with a resolution of 20 m. Atoll uses the order of the maps in the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window to decide which data to use.10.2. Independently of the order of the two maps in the Explorer window. "Clutter 2" is on top of "Clutter 1".

another user. 3. once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters. height. name. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is saved into an external file. transparency. and indoor loss) raster or user profile traffic map description. For information. For information on how to display information in tooltips. you can save much of this information in a user configuration file. Note: You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well. standard deviations. The surface area is only given for closed polygons.77: Multi-layer management in calculations – two clutter maps representing the same area 3.12. orthogonality factor. default standard deviations. etc. can import the configuration file containing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters. 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ." In Case 2. Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.12 Geographic Data Sets In Atoll.) clutter description (code.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set When you export a geo data set in a user configuration file. To display information about the geo data in a tool tip: • Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. ) on the toolbar has been 3. see the Administrator Manual." Explorer window Work space Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (20m) • Clutter 1 (50m) Case 2 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (50m) • Clutter 1 (20m) Figure 3. indoor loss.Atoll User Manual "Clutter 2. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. percentage pilot finger of each clutter class. In this section. Note: Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( selected.11 Displaying Information About Geo Data You can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips. Atoll will only use the data from "Clutter 1." Therefore. working on a similar Atoll document. "Clutter 1" is on top and completely covers "Clutter 2. When you export the geographic data set. tips text. Then. you export: • • • • the paths of imported geographic maps map display settings (visibility scale. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 112 "Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 113.

4. Erdas Imagine (16-bit). "Editing Polygons. The Save As dialogue appears. lines.13 Editing Geographic Data In Atoll. The User Configuration dialogue appears.12. The Open dialogue appears. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3. clear the Delete existing geo data check box. 5. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Geoclimatic maps (for more information. SHP. To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set: 1. adding a vector layer to the Population folder and then adding polygons. You can also edit the Windows shortcut to Atoll and add "-cfg <. browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name. 4. select the Delete existing geo data check box. Atoll checks if there are already geographic data in the current Atoll document. 3.. select the check boxes of the items you want to import. If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data. DXF. Click OK. MIF. 6. When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configuration file. Click OK. In the User Configuration dialogue. 3.78). the option Delete existing geo data appears with other options in the User Configuration dialogue. or TAB format) (for more information. "Editing Clutter Class Maps" on page 114) Contours. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data To export a geo data set in a user configuration file: 1. 3. Browse to the user configuration file.cfg" and placing it in the same folder as the Atoll executable. Note: You can automatically start Atoll with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 113 . for example.78: The User Configuration dialogue 3. In the Save As dialogue. i. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is imported into your current Atoll document. Click OK. and Points" on page 34) Population maps (if they are in vector format. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Traffic data maps Custom data maps (for more information. 5. AGD. you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by. 2. Lines. 2. In the User Configuration dialogue. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115).2 Importing a Geo Data Set When you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. select it and click Open. Figure 3. select the Geographic Data Set check box. If you already have geographic data in your current Atoll document and would like to replace it with any imported data. The following types of geographic data can be edited: • • • • • • Clutter classes (for more information. If so.e. and points (for more information.

Select Edit from the context menu. The pointer changes ( ). Note: You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.1. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken into account by propagation model calculations.79). Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. Figure 3. select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create.79: Editor toolbar 4. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. ii. You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons. The point is deleted. Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes to a pencil ( ). The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. 3. a polygon drawing tool . 2.79). a polygon deletion tool .Atoll User Manual 3. ii.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps Clutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. You can now edit the clutter polygon by: Moving a point: i. 2. Adding a point: i. Drag the point to its new position. A point is added to the border at the position of the pointer. The pointer changes ( ). Select Edit from the context menu.13. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon. ii. Double-click to close the polygon. "Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 115 3. Note: Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue. From the list. The pointer changes ( ). 8. You can later edit and export the polygons you have created.2 Editing Clutter Polygons You can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points. Click the polygon drawing button ( ).13. 4. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. Deleting a point: i. 5. 3. In this section. To create a polygon: 1. To edit clutter polygons: 1. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The context menu appears. the following are explained: • • • • "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114 "Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 114 "Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 115. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. 114 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons. 6. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. 7. Select the polygon. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon In Atoll.13. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list. 3. and a Close button (see Figure 3.1.

Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. Select Edit from the context menu. 2. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.13. Note: You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the polygon.13. 8. 3. The context menu appears. Double-click to close the contour. 2. Right-click the geo data object. For Atoll to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selected geo data object folder. to which you want to add a vector layer. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.2 Editing Geoclimatic Maps Some geographic data maps. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. 5. The polygon is deleted. click the New Polygon button ( a. The pointer changes ( ). 7.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons You can delete clutter polygons. 4. ) or the New Rectangle ( ) button on the Vector Edition toolbar. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. folder. lines.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. 5. 3. for example. The Properties dialogue appears with the coordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area. c. c. 3. The context menu appears.1. b. the Geoclimatic Parameters. 10. Right-click the new vector layer. 3. 2. geoclimatic maps. 4.79). you can ensure that you select the correct folder. To draw a polygon. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Select Edit from the context menu. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. and points) to this layer. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 115 . For information on renaming objects. 3.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons To display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area: 1. Select Edit from the context menu. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. b. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. To draw a rectangle. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon ( 11. Click the polygon you want to delete. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu.1. To create a vector layer and vector objects on a geo data map: 1. Click the polygon deletion tool ( ). Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. are made up of individual vector objects. 9. 4. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. By renaming each vectors folder. Enter a value: Geoclimatic Parameters: Enter a value in the Rain Intensity field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for the polygon.13. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. folder. Right-click the new polygon or rectangle and select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. To delete a clutter polygon: 1. ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: 6. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects (contours.79). Right-click the the Geoclimatic Parameters. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. click the New Rectangle button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: a. you must map the vector layer.

Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. Saving a geographic file separately from saving the Atoll document enables you to: • • • • • Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding TFW file containing the georeference information. you can save your modifications to an external file. or in a different raster format. enter a name for the file. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. The Save As dialogue appears. exporting either the entire geo data or just your modifications allows you to save those modifications to an external file. You can edit the vector objects as explained in "Editing Polygons. Lines. Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save the selected part as a new file.1. and select the file format from the Save as type list. 5.80). BIL: When you select the BIL format. you can save them as one file. in the same format or in another one. GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab. When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file. TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export.Atoll User Manual 12. 4.1 Saving Modifications to an External File In Atoll. "Rain" is selected by default. see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96). Atoll automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing the georeference information. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. This section explains the following: • • • • • "Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 116 "Updating the Source File" on page 117 "Combining Several Files into One File" on page 118 "Exporting an Embedded File" on page 118 "Creating a New File from a Larger File" on page 119 3. 3. you can export them to a new external file. Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data type in Atoll. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. or just your modifications to the geo data. You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data. JPEG 2000: When you select the JPEG 2000 format. 3. This section explains the following: • • "Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 116 "Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117. Export an embedded file to be used in another Atoll document or in another application: You can save a file to an external file.14. 2.14. When exporting in BIL format. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats (for more information. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. 3. To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file: 1. the part containing the computation zone. TIF: When you select tagged image file format. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. The Properties dialogue appears. 13. You can select from one of the following file formats: BMP: When you select bitmap format. Select Properties from the context menu. and Points" on page 34. For the following geo data: Geoclimatic Parameters: In the Field column. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the georeference information. Select Save As from the context menu. Click the Data Mapping tab. either in the same format as used in the current Atoll document.14 Saving Geographic Data Atoll allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the Atoll document. you can save these changes to the source file. 116 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . In the Save As dialogue.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File You can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file. Click Save.

A vector layer can contain contours. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. 3. The context menu appears. right-click the vector layer folder. You can embed the file afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). 5. MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats. 8. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported file replaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file. it cannot save vectors made of lines or points.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File You can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. Click OK. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 117 . 2. SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. the suggested resolution is 100 m. and points. Atoll prompts you to save the changes when you close the document. use either the AGD.2 Updating the Source File While working on an Atoll document. lines. - 4. the MIF or the TAB format. and select the file format from the Save as type list. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in the current Atoll document. Along with vector layers you have added to the Geo tab. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. The Save As dialogue appears. Under Region. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. enter a name for the file. In the Save As dialogue. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the clutter classes.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. you may make changes to geo data. the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object. To export a vector layer: 1. If the Atoll document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM. If the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. The Vector Export dialogue appears. Define a Resolution in Metres.80: Export dialogue 6. Select Save As from the context menu. Click Export. - - 7. the following maps can be exported as vector format files: • • • Vector-format population maps Vector-format geoclimatic maps Vector-format custom maps. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classes geo data folder. If several objects have been modified. The selected data is saved in an external file.1. Atoll saves the changes automatically when you save the document. As a format created for Atoll. You can select from one of the following file formats: AGD: The Atoll Geographic Data format is an Atoll-specific format. 3. If there is no initial clutter class object. Once you save a vector layer. displaying the current coordinate system and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change. Click Save in the Save As dialogue.14. no other clutter class geo data file. The suggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria: If one object has been modified. the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified objects. the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps. If the geo data file is linked. Atoll can read AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats.14. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points. or traffic objects. 3. whether or not the computation zone is visible.

The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Therefore. Define a Resolution in Metres. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. 3. for example.Atoll User Manual To update the source file of a linked geo data file: 1. the combined file will show the file on the top. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The Save As dialogue appears. The context menu appears. Select Save As from the context menu. 2. The Save As dialogue appears. Select Save As from the context menu. or in a different application. 3. Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file.81). 3. If you do not want to replace the current file. The context menu appears. Select Save from the context menu. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geo data files. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export.81). 6. 3. 5. 8. The selected data is saved as a new file. To export an embedded geo data file: 1. 2. 3. You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps To combine individual files into a new file: 1.4 Exporting an Embedded File You can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different Atoll document. the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 4.3 Combining Several Files into One File In certain circumstances. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click OK. 7.14. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. 4. If the geo data file is a vector file. you may have several geo data files of the same type. If the files overlap on the map. The linked file is updated. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117). 2. Under Region. The suggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects. 5. select The Entire Project Area. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Atoll replaces the embedded file in the current Atoll document with the newly exported file. You can combine these separate files to create one single file. Caution: You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file. The files will be combined according to their order from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 118 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . When you export an embedded file. ensure that you want to replace the current file before proceeding to the following step. Click OK.14. after importing an MSI Planet® index file. Click OK. Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. The context menu appears.

To change the coordinate system used for the exported file.5 Creating a New File from a Larger File You can create a new file from a section of a larger file. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the geo data. c.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. The exported file will replace the embedded file in the Geo data tab. The Save As dialogue appears. Click OK.82). Under Region.81: The Vector Export dialogue a. Click Export. 2. Define a Resolution in Metres. You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Population Geoclimatic maps To create a new file from a section of a larger file: 1. Select Save As from the context menu. Figure 3. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. You can use this new file in the same Atoll document. If the geo data file is a raster file. you must first define the area by creating a computation zone. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. For information on the Coordinate Systems dialogue. 3. click Change. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 119 . the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. whether or not the computation zone is visible. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file. The context menu appears.81).14. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. or in a new Atoll document. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. b. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. - b. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file. To create a new file.82: Export dialogue a. Click OK. The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system. 3. The selected data is saved in an external file. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. 4. 5.

Under Region. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. 8. 120 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. select The Computation Zone. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. 7. Click OK. Define a Resolution in Metres. The selected data is saved as a new file.Atoll User Manual 6. whether or not the computation zone is visible.

Chapter 4 Antennas and Equipment .

.

the equipment used to create a network is modelled. The MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue appears. To create an entry in the Manufacturers table. and antenna diameter.1 Creating an Antenna The microwave antenna is used to radiate or receive electromagnetic energy in the form of high-frequency radio waves. Select Antennas > New from the context menu. Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas. horizontal and vertical plane diagrams for horizontal and vertical polarization. and defined by the operating frequency band. Because an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized. the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment.. 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor. Click the General tab. The context menu appears. i. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Atoll uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams when determining propagation. 5. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4 Antennas and Equipment In Atoll. and diameter). 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. As well. name. each microwave antenna is identified by a name. To create or modify an entry in the Manufacturers table: 1. 3. along with the characteristics which have a bearing on network performance. 5. manufacturer. To modify an entry in the Manufacturers table. 2. vertical pattern.2. Tip: To create an antenna: When you create a new antenna. gain. manufacturer name.2 Defining Antennas In Atoll. Atoll models microwave antennas and provides default microwave antennas.e. horizontal and vertical antenna patterns.. 4. 4.1 Defining the List of Manufacturers In Atoll. The operating frequency band and manufacturer-related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatible antenna/equipment sets. Atoll enables you to create new antennas and set the parameters of each (i. Each of these patterns can have both co-polar and cross-polar patterns defined. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ): Name: The name of the manufacturer. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Comments: Any comments. and antennas are listed in the Manufacturers table. You can enter information in the following fields: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 123 . horizontal pattern. 4. The Manufacturers table appears. This chapter explains working with antennas as well as equipment such as waveguides and cables: • • • • • "Defining the List of Manufacturers" on page 123 "Defining Antennas" on page 123 "Microwave Equipment" on page 127 "Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 138. The context menu appears. Select Manufacturers > Open table from the context menu. 6. 2. In this section the following are described: • • • • "Creating an Antenna" on page 123 "Importing Microwave Antennas" on page 125 "Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 125 "Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 126. Right-click the Links folder. gain.e. waveguides. 4. Right-click the Links folder.

A microwave antenna is defined by 8 radiation patterns. Comments: Any additional information on the antenna. Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available. Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern.Atoll User Manual Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna. - - 6. you can define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna: Horizontal polarisation . Horizontal: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section.Vertical plane: - - Vertical polarisation . e. Diameter: The diameter of the antenna. Under Cross Polar Discrimination (XPD). Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern. Paste the data in the table. displays the cross polar discriminations for horizontal and vertical polarisations. On each of the four tabs of the antenna properties dialogue. You can modify the name Atoll enters if you wish. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from existing pattern values. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. 7. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. Switch to Atoll. 124 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from the existing pattern values. for the vertical polarisation.Horizontal plane: Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane.Vertical: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. f. Atoll interpolates the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern around the antenna. Define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna. .Vertical plane: - a. c. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Frequency Band: The frequency band that this antenna will be used with. Click OK. Copy the selected data.83: Copying horizontal pattern values d. Atoll removes blank rows in the pattern table when you press the Apply button. Figure 4. Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern.Horizontal plane: - - Vertical polarisation . Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. If there are some blank rows in the data sheet. Click Apply to display the pattern. Horizontal polarisation . Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern. Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain. If some values are missing in the data sheet. When you calculate along an angle for which no data is available. for the horizontal polarisation. g. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. When you paste the data into the MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue. b.

1. Atoll automatically calculates the antenna diameter from the antenna gain and average operating frequency. Select Antennas > Import from the context menu. To edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna: 1. The file or folders are imported. see the following web site: http://www. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern window and choosing the either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.99. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. 8. Note: You can display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open.2. 4. you can modify antenna patterns by editing them individually or you can copy the antenna patterns of one antenna and replace the antenna patterns of another antenna: • • "Editing a Single Radiation Pattern" on page 125 "Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas" on page 126. The context menu appears.2.fcc. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp. 5. The MW Antennas table appears. 8.html. Atoll continues until all files are imported and then displays how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported in the Events viewer.2 Importing Microwave Antennas Atoll enables you to import antenna files in the Planet microwave antenna format or in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16.050). Right-click the Links folder. Edit the antenna pattern by entering new values in the table. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. 4. Select the tab of the pattern you want to edit (for information on the tabs of the antenna’s Properties dialogue. To import antenna files: 1. 2. see "Creating an Antenna" on page 123).3 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns In Atoll.11 – Log  Max Frequency – Min Frequency  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------  2 20 Diametre  m  = 10 For more information on antenna file formats.Minimum Frequency)/2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Data Import dialogue appears. The average operating frequency is calculated as (Maximum Frequency . Atoll does not stop the import process if an error occurs. see the Technical Reference Guide. 5.89. Click Import. In the Data Import dialogue. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 3. Editing a Single Radiation Pattern You can edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna.003 and WG16. For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16. Click the Browse button ( 7. which gives:  Gain  dBi  + 2. 7. The antenna’s Properties dialogue appears. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.99. Right-click the antenna in the Antennas table whose horizontal or vertical pattern you want to edit. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 125 . 6.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. 3. 4. 6.0501. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. The antenna diameter is calculated using the following equation for a radiation efficiency of 55 %: Gain  dBi  = 20  Log  Diametre  m   + 20   Frequency  MHz   – 42.2 .

2. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print. In the row of the antenna with the pattern you want to copy. Select Edit > Paste to paste the antenna pattern. 4.4 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns To print the pattern of a microwave antenna: 1. The MW Antennas table appears. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern of an antenna and choosing either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 7. Select Edit > Copy to copy the cell.2.H Plane: Vertical polarization . The Properties dialogue appears. . 7. The MW Antennas table appears. . Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Figure 4.V Plane: Horizontal polarization .84: MW Antennas table 5. select the cell with the pattern. By resizing row height and column width.84). Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. 3. In the row of the antenna you want to copy the pattern to. select the cell with the pattern. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu. By copying and pasting patterns in the MW Antennas table you can assign the antenna patterns of one antenna to another.horizontal plane H Polar.horizontal plane V Polar. 4. The context menu appears. 4.Atoll User Manual Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas Atoll enables you to copy antenna patterns in the MW Antennas table. you can view all antenna patterns in order to be able to compare them (see Figure 4. .vertical plane 8. To open the MW Antennas table: 1.vertical plane V Polar. The context menu appears. . 8. 3.V Plane: Vertical polarization . Atoll replaces the old pattern with the new one in the MW Antennas table. Select Record Properties from the context menu. Select the tab with the antenna pattern you want to print: H Polar. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. 6. 5. Notes: • You can also copy an antenna pattern by right-clicking the pattern on the tab of the antenna’s Properties dialogue and selecting Copy from the context menu. 126 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 6. 2. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.H Plane: Horizontal polarization . • Patterns are displayed in the MW Antennas table with either linear or logarithmic axes as defined in the Properties dialogue of an individual antenna. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Right-click the Links folder.

Radiation pattern: The radiation pattern is a diagram showing the direction of the radiated power. 4. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu. flat or planar. lens. as well as the equipment that constitute it. parabolic.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 9. In general. The main characteristics of the microwave antenna are the following: • Directivity: In practical terms. Using polarisation enables the same radio frequency to be used by different radio systems in physical proximity to one another. Front-to-Back Ratio (FBR): The FBR is the ratio of the power radiated in the desired direction to the power radiated in the opposite direction. the higher the FBR. Antenna The antenna is the part of the microwave link that transmits electromagnetic energy from transmission lines into the air and receives transmitted electromagnetic energy from the air to be then sent on transmission lines. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 127 . horn. yagi. or array) to achieve its specific objectives. is composed of three main sub-systems: • • • Indoor unit (IDU) Outdoor unit (ODU) Antenna Figure 4. typically between 35 and 50 dB. • • Gain: The gain is the amount of power radiated in a given direction using only the RF power at the input terminals of the antenna.3 Microwave Equipment Microwave radio equipment are the elements used to convert the initial data to microwave frequency signals that can then be transmitted over a given microwave link and to the elements used to convert microwave frequency signals received to data.85: Radio system components Indoor Unit (IDU) The IDU is the termination point of the end-user equipment that generates the data to be carried by the microwave link. the higher the gain of the antenna. The antenna can be in one of many different shapes (for example. The portion of the pattern where the maximum gain occurs is often referred to as the main lobe of the pattern Polarisation: Polarisation is the ability to transmit only one of the two electromagnetic vector components of the wave (either the horizontal component or the vertical component). The microwave radio system. It consists of the following components: • • The radio modem that converts the digital signal into a form suitable for modulation on the radio carrier signal The power supply for the Outdoor Unit (ODU) Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU converts the modulated signal from its low frequency form to a high frequency radio signal in the appropriate radio band and channel for radio transmission. directivity is defined as: • • The ability to send the transmitted power in only the desired direction The ability to reject undesired signals coming from other directions.

e.86: Polarisation • Cross Polarisation Discrimination (XPD): The XPD is the ratio of power received in the desired polarisation to the power received in undesired polarisation. 5. Max ATPC also enables the transmitter to respond to increased interference levels resulting from ATPC on other links. 2.3. modulation and demodulation of signals to be transmitted and signals received at the antenna. the equipment protection configuration). Enter the power range reserved for Adaptive Transmission Power Control (Max ATPC) and the maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF). It is used to reduce the scattering of interference from the undesired polarisation into the desired polarisation due to rain fading by increasing the cross-polarisation discrimination factor (XPD). Select Equipment > New from the context menu. You can create a new piece of microwave equipment using the MW Equipment table. power control. the 128 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . to describe the system configuration in terms of channels and to define supported bit rates using trunk types with defined digital hierarchy. the IDU and ODU are combined and modelled as microwave equipment. the standby channel frequency must be the same as one of the active channels. the system is called a "cold" standby system. Right-click the Links folder. The system configuration is defined in the form of "n + m" where "n" is the number of active channels and "m" is the number of standby channels.1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll In Atoll. Standby channels are inactive and used only when active channels fail. If a hot standby system is available. XPD is a design parameter that is maximized in the main lobe of the antenna pattern. To create a piece of microwave equipment: 1. 128 QAM modulation is modelled as shown below: 4 PSK (QPSK) modulation is modelled as shown below: - Enter the maximum power (Max Power) and the Noise Figure. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. XPIF is generally within the range of 15-20 dB. The MW Equipment New Element Properties dialogue appears. 3. see "Defining Antennas" on page 123.. Microwave transceiver equipment is used to manage output power. and then define its parameters using its Properties dialogue. The defining parameters of each piece of microwave equipment are stored in the MW Equipment table. For cold standby systems. For a hot standby system. If the system must be manually switched to the standby channel. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. set the following parameters: Enter the Model or descriptive name of the equipment. Switching to the standby channel in case of failure can be automatic and is then referred to a "hot" standby system. The context menu appears. Enter the Frequency Band that this equipment will use. The maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF) is used only when an XPIC (cross-polarized interference canceller) is present. The Max ATPC can be optionally taken into consideration during calculations. On the General tab of Properties dialogue. - Specify the System Configuration (i. For more information on antennas.Atoll User Manual Vertical polarisation Horizontal polarisation Figure 4. the following are explained: • • • "Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll" on page 128 "Importing Microwave Equipment" on page 132 "Advanced Configuration" on page 132. The Max ATPC is used by the transmitter to adjust power by increasing or reducing it in order to maintain signal quality in case of multipath or rain fading that temporarily attenuates the received signal. 4. you must select the Hot Standby Available check box. In this section. 4. Enter the Number of States and select the modulation from the Modulation list.

select the digital hierarchy type (SDH/SONET or PDH). Lundgren and W. "Characterizing the effects of multipath dispersion on digital radios. Rummler.530 recommendation. Figure 4. This method will characterise the ability of a receiving equipment to perform successfully (i. Frequencies allocated to active and standby channels are defined in the microwave link properties dialogue. 1727-1732. 1 + 1 redundancy mode with monitored hot standby (Hot Standby Available) is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration.D. the number of trunks) and the trunk type from the list. W. On the Hierarchy and Rate tab of Properties dialogue. Under Radio Signature. "Digital radio outage due to selective fading. 2. set the following parameters: Under Digital Hierarchy. May-June 1979..D. see studies by C.4 5.e. The other equipment. Rummler2 and the ITU P. but only the main equipment is active. prediction from laboratory simulations. which will serve as a back-up in case the main equipment fails.W. The Kn parameter is mostly dependant on the modulation used. Lundgren and W. pp. both the main and standby equipment are on. Modulation 64-QAM 16-QAM 8-PSK 4-PSK Kn 15. pp. Note: The radio signature parameters are not used by all types of receiver equipment. 1073-1100.." Bell System Technical Journal." IEEE Globecom Proceedings. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 129 . C.5 7 1 Kn values (without adaptive equalization) Rummler Model: If you want to use the Rummler model to predict outage times. select Rummler model. 6. produce acceptable errors rates) in the presence of frequency-selective fading. 1 + 1 redundancy mode is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. - Under Rate.87: Defining the method to be used to predict outage times Normalised: For a normalised signature. only the main equipment is active and on. is not turned on. and define the frequency shift (Width) and Depth for both minimum and non-minimum phases. 1988. This information is available from the manufacturer.observation vs. select Normalised and enter a value for the Kn Parameter. choose the method to be used to predict outage times (dispersive fade margin) due to multipath fading. For more information.W.D. The standby equipment will be automatically put into service immediately if the main equipment fails.e. Rummler.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment standby channel frequency can be different from active channels. select the Capacity (i.

define the (BER-Sensitivity) pairs. On the Losses tab of Properties dialogue. Enter the receiver signal level (threshold) at which the radio runs continuous errors at a specified rate (BER). It is used to calculate the margin against enhancements.Atoll User Manual The rate is calculated by the capacity per trunk multiplied by the number of trunks: The minimal and standardised channel bandwidth resulting from the parameters defined on the Hierarchy and Rate tab is displayed under Channel Bandwidth.. On the Sensitivity tab of Properties dialogue. and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. select User-defined C/I min. define the Overflow Threshold. and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. 7. and define the losses on Transmission and Reception. Under Signal Enhancements Margin Calculation (E). Enter the Hot Standby Commutation Delay. The Hot Standby - 130 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll will calculates the required quality based on the user-defined interference margin. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is the maximum amount of time it would take to switch to backup equipment if the main equipment fails. Under Cross-polar Discrimination Reduction Calculation (MXPD). 8. as well as the quality required for a BER of 10-3 and 10-6 in the For a BER of 1e-3 and the For a BER of 1e-3 text boxes. The MTBF is used to define the reliability of the equipment and corresponds to the average length of time that the equipment functions without failing. You can enter the channel bandwidth defined by the manufacturer in the From manufacturer text box. set the following parameters: Enter the losses due to the use of filters on transmission (Transmission Filter) and reception (Reception Filter): - For each circulator present on this piece of equipment. On the Outages tab of Properties dialogue.: If you want to use a calculated minimum C⁄I. This will be used to calculate the thermal fade margin. set the following parameters: Enter the Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF). 9.: If you want to define a minimum C⁄I. The overflow threshold is the maximum receiver sensitivity before saturation. - - - User-defined C/I min. set the Port it is attached to. you can define how the MXPD is calculated: Calculated C/I min. The MTBF is available from the equipment manufacturer. set the following parameters: Under Calculation of the Thermal Fade Margin (TFM). select Calculated C/I min..

) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). the received power level in dB is compared to the maximum power level to determine whether the interference is acceptable. when you define the properties for a link.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. 6. to let Atoll create the graph from standard values. The context menu appears. This is done instead of calculating C/I values and comparing them to the published objectives. On the Transmitter Mask tab of Properties dialogue. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. On the T⁄I Graph tab of Properties dialogue. The T/I graph defines the graph of maximum interfering power levels for different frequency separations between the transmitter and victim receivers. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. 10. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. Right-click the record whose properties you want to edit. 12. 3. you must indicate which channel will be used as a backup in case of main equipment failure. 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 131 . The microwave transceiver equipment’s Properties dialogue appears. Right-click the Links folder. 13. Select Record Properties from the context menu. 11. For more information on defining link properties. On the Receiver Mask tab of Properties dialogue. The context menu appears. 7. The resulting T⁄I graph is displayed in the graph window on the right. You can edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment through the properties dialogues. 4. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The threshold-to-interference (T/I) ratio is used to calculate the interference fade margin (IFM) which defines the vulnerability to co-channel and adjacent channel interference. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. 5. For each interfering transmitter. The Equipment table appears. Click OK to create the new piece of equipment. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. define a receiver mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. Edit the properties as previously explained in this section. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. define a threshold-to-interference (T⁄I) graph either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. To edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment: 1.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment Commutation Delay is used only if Hot Standby Available is selected on the General tab of this Properties dialogue. Furthermore. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. define the transmitter spectral mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The resulting transmitter mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. It is provided by the manufacturer. The resulting receiver mask is displayed in the graph window on the right.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer.

see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. The synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) refers to the group or layers of transmission rates or standards that can transport digital data of different capacities through high bandwidth mediums such as optical fibres or radio waves. Due to the synchronous nature of the SDH. NSMA-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension NSM.1 Digital Hierarchies Atoll models PDH as well as SDH digital hierarchies. 3. PDH networks have data streams with the same nominal frequency but are not synchronised with each other.3. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. 2. the rising and falling edges of the pulses in each data streams do not coincide. digital hierarchies are modelled as trunk types. In Atoll. The following section describes creating and modifying trunk types to model digital hierarchies. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder. Each equipment file can contain several T/I graphs for different pairs of modulations. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 4. if you have the data available in tabular format.Atoll User Manual 4. The plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio. Notes: Atoll does not stop the import process when an error occurs.0). 6. A microwave link inherits the capacity of the trunk type through its assigned equipment. it can take a long time. The European and American versions of PDH systems differ slightly in their data rates. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. In the Data Import dialogue. 5. The frame formats and thus the data rates of both systems are not the same but are compatible due to their synchronous nature. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the Trunk Type table. Click Import. Select Equipment > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu. 132 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The European (SDH) and American (SONET) versions of SDH systems differ slightly. the average frequency of all slave clocks in the system is the same. In this case. in other words.3.3 Advanced Configuration Atoll offers several advanced configuration options: • • • "Digital Hierarchies" on page 132 "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 133 "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. It continues until all the files have been imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported. For further information about the NSMA and Pathloss file formats. but the basic principles of multiplexing are the same. The context menu appears. a microwave link that has a capacity of 2 with an assigned trunk type of E1 will be capable of transferring data at twice the E1 standard bit rate. For more information on the theoretical graphs. Pathloss-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension RAF. the T/I graph defined for identical modulations is imported into the T/I Graph tab while the others are imported into the theoretical graphs table. Right-click the Links folder. For example. To import equipment files: 1. 4. However.051 or in Pathloss format (version 4.3. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. see the Technical Reference Guide.3. 4. The Data Import dialogue appears. Note: If you are creating a large number of different trunk types from manufacturers data. but you can create new trunk types and set their parameters.2 Importing Microwave Equipment Atoll enables you to import equipment files that are in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) format defined by the recommendation WG 21. 8. Creating a Microwave Trunk Type Atoll has a set of default trunk type definitions available. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. Click the Browse button ( 7. The file or folders are imported. Each defined trunk type defines a supported bit rate and is a parameter of microwave equipment.99.

530-8 recommendation.. the rate of the useful bits not including the overheads bits). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.88: Trunk Types table 5.89: Trunk type Properties dialogue 4.e.e. add the following data: Trunk Type: The name of the trunk type that will model the digital hierarchy. 4.2 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. the digital hierarchy being modelled is SDH or SONET. BERses: BERses corresponds to Bit Error Rate (BER) as documented in Annex 2. If the check box is not selected ( ).88). Figure 4. the useful bits plus the overheads bits). The context menu appears. The trunk type’s Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Binary Rate Supported (Mbit/s): The binary rate supported is the payload rate (i. Figure 4. Table 2) of the ITU-R P. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. the digital hierarchy being modelled is PDH.89). SDH/SONET: If the check box is selected ( ). For each trunk type you define.3. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. Bits/Block: The number of bits per block corresponds to the number of bits per frame (i. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 133 . 2.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment To create a microwave trunk type: 1. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).3. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal.. No. Right-click on the Links folder. Select Equipment > Digital Hierarchies from the context menu. You can also define the properties of a trunk type in its Properties dialogue. To open a trunk type’s Properties dialogue: • Double-click the trunk type in the left margin of the Trunk Types table. Binary Rate (Mbit/s): The binary rate is the gross data rate of the frame if all the bits are used for traffic.

In this section. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. Figure 4. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. or the theoretical graphs if not. If so. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment.91).90: IRF table 5. 6.90). The context menu appears. Otherwise. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list. Figure 4. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. If the equipment manufacturer. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. 2. capacity and modulation. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 134 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 135. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table.Atoll User Manual The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. Atoll uses it. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. Right-click on the Links folder. capacity. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3.91: IRF record Properties dialogue 134 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. or modulation are not the same. 4. 2. If so. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available.

Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. delete an IRF graph. Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 135 . The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue.90). 4. 8. The context menu appears. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. Figure 4. 9. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. 6. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. 2. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. Click OK. You can now define an IRF graph. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click on the Links folder. 7.92: IRF Setting dialogue 5.

The context menu appears. 136 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. 9. These theoretical graphs can describe either the transmitter mask. c. 5. rate. Under Enter graph values. The context menu appears. e. Select Add Record from the context menu.uk and transmitter and receiver masks have been found at http:\\www. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. T/I graphs have been found at the web address http://www. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries.3. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate as a function of the level of interference.. Right-click the theoretical graph you want to modify. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. 6. 4. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Select Record Properties from the context menu. Click OK. Select Delete from the context menu. The context menu appears. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. or the receiver mask. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. the T/I graph) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. f. Note: You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.gov. Select Equipment > Theoretical Graphs from the context menu. when information about the transmitter mask. Manufacturer: The manufacturer for which the graph is valid. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Type of Graph: The type of theoretical graph you define. They can be used to initialise equipment properties (the transmitter mask. 4. b. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. Rate: The rate for which the graph is valid. 3. d.3 Theoretical Graphs Atoll allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (i. b.3 Creating Theoretical Graphs A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions of C/I. The theoretical graph’s Properties dialogue appears. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer. Modulation: The modulation for which the graph is valid.radio. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.Atoll User Manual To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Under Reception Filter.ero. the receiver mask. The Theoretical Graphs table appears.dk. Right-click the Links folder. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. the receiver mask. g. A dialogue appears. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). b. 7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. or T/I graph is missing). and modulation. Channel Width: The bandwidth for which the graph is valid. To create a theoretical graph: 1. c. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. Click the General tab and define the following parameters: Name: The name of the theoretical graph. frequency band.3. Frequency Band: The frequency band for which the graph is valid. d. Click OK. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. bandwidth. or a receiver mask. Default theoretical graphs are available for different frequency bands and bandwidths. Under Transmitter Filter.e. It can be either a transmitter mask. or a T/I graph.

you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the MWGuides table. and therefore there is no radiation loss. the lower the loss. The electric and magnetic fields are contained within the guide. Figure 4. on the other hand. A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies. The MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. called the cut-off frequency. The following sections describe the modelling of waveguides and cables in Atoll: • • "Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube. If the graph describes the transmitter mask. ) opens the Prop- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 137 . the thicker the cable. define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Hence. microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss a signal undergoes per 100m of their length. Once a microwave waveguide or cable has been defined. The waveguide is designed for a specific wavelength. The context menu appears. have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area. 4. define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph. Click OK. 3. with very low attenuation. Select Waveguides and Cables > New from the context menu.93: MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue 5. For the new waveguide or cable. Cables. The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. If the graph describes the receiver mask. Note: If you are creating a large number of waveguides and cables based on manufacturers data. if you have the data available in tabular format. 4. the dielectric losses are also negligible. 9. To create a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. it can take a long time. Cable loss is measured in terms of decibels per 100m. you can assign it to a microwave link for both transmission and reception.4 Microwave Waveguides and Cables Waveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipment to the microwave antenna. For information on the MWGuides table. 2.93). Since the dielectric is air. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. 4. see "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. These are quite robust and therefore easy to install. The dielectric material is usually air or foam.4.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. However. the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. Right-click the Links folder. called a waveguide. define the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables In Atoll. define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. If the graph is a T/I graph.

6. To modify a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. 4. 2. or Rectangular. you can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables to define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. Select Waveguides and Cables > Open Table from the context menu. In this section. Circular. The defined compatible antenna/ equipment/waveguide sets can be then selected when you define the properties of a microwave link.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and waveguides.1. these compatibility definitions can be used to display only compatible antennas. Click OK. Elliptic. The context menu appears. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. 3.1 Defining Compatibility Manually In Atoll. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. ) opens the Prop- Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. 4. 4. and waveguides as options in lists. antennas. Right-click the record in the Waveguides and Cables table that you want to modify. For the waveguide or cable. 5..4. The Waveguides and Cables table appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. equipment. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. equipment. You can select from Cable. or Rectangular. 8. You can define compatibility directly in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables or you can use the assistants available in Atoll to define compatibility.e.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable In Atoll. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. In this section. you can modify the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll allows you to define compatibility between antennas. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table: 1. 4. The record’s Properties dialogue appears. Circular. 138 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .5. When you define the properties (i.5. and waveguides) of a microwave link.Atoll User Manual Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. You can select from Cable. 7. the following are explained: • • "Defining Compatibility Manually" on page 138 "Using Assistants to Define Compatibility" on page 139. Select Record Properties from the context menu. the following are explained: • • "Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table" on page 138 "Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table" on page 139 4. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Other. Other. Right-click the Links folder. 3. you can access and modify any defined microwave waveguide or cable using the MWGuides table. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. and waveguides. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. The context menu appears. 6. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. Elliptic. equipment. Click OK.

the following are explained: • • "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 139 "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 140. antennas.2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. by default. Create a new antenna/waveguide compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and a Guide from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). and waveguides) of a microwave link. a piece of equipment compatible with an antenna will be compatible with the waveguides compatible with this antenna. 4. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter. respectively. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 4. The values in the Antenna and Equipment lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MW Equipment table. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. You can also. 5. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. 2.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. The Antenna/Guides Compatibility table appears. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. 4.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. 4. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. 3.5. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides: 1. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. A dialogue appears. 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 2. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table: 1. 5. equipment. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs. Select the Guide Manufacturer from the list. You can also. enter a Comment by double-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. these compatibility definitions can be used in order to display only compatible antennas.2. equipment. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 139 . 4. In this section. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. Create a new antenna/equipment compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and Equipment from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). these are taken into account and.. Only waveguides manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. respectively. Right-click on the Links folder. The Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table appears. enter a Comment by doubleclicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. The values in the Antenna and Guide lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MWGuides table. if desired. Select the Frequency Band from the list.5.5. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6.e. and waveguides as options in lists. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and waveguides that operate in the same frequency band. The context menu appears. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7.1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Open Table from the context menu. The context menu appears.2 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility Atoll provides assistants to help you define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. When you define the properties (i. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Edit Grid from the context menu. if desired.

Select Delete from the context menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Select the Equipment Manufacturer from the list. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and waveguide are compatible. You can use the Fill (Up.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment. To delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: a. Select Add Record from the context menu. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and equipment that operate in the same frequency band. 4. 5. b. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6.2. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 140 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennawaveguide pairs. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. Right. b. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. Down. 4. Select the Frequency Band from the list. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment: 1. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Edit Grid from the context menu. 9.Atoll User Manual 8.5. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide or delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: To define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide: a. Click OK. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. The cell is no longer marked in green. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. A dialogue appears.

b. Click OK. Click OK to close the properties dialogue.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. To define compatibility with an antenna. In the properties dialogue. The context menu appears. under List of the Compatible Guides. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/ waveguide pairs. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. c. a piece of equipment. To delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair: a. Right-click on the square and select Record Properties from the context menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. select the waveguides that you want to make compatible with this antenna/equipment pair. or define compatibility with an antenna. Select Add Record from the context menu. the waveguides compatible with the corresponding antenna are selected. these are taken into account and. The properties dialogue opens. b. The cell is no longer marked in green. and waveguides: a. a piece of equipment. and waveguides: To define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 141 . b. Select Add Record from the context menu. Right. You can use the Fill (Up. e. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennaequipment pairs. delete a defined compatible antennaequipment pair. Down. 9. by default. The context menu appears. Select Delete from the context menu. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment. The context menu appears. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with the entries for the antenna and the equipment. d.

Atoll User Manual 142 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands .

Atoll User Manual 144 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

The characteristics of microwave frequency bands are different depending on the frequency. managing frequency bands and sub-bands is explained: • • • "Microwave Frequency Bands" on page 145 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands" on page 146 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands" on page 147.497-6 ITU-R F. The length of a microwave length is dependent upon the frequency: as the frequency increases.636-3 ITU-R F.385-7 ITU-R F. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 2 GHz 7 GHz 10 GHz 80 km 50 km 45 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Multipath fading Up to 370 cm for a 36 dB gain Up to 370 cm for a 46.8 dB gain Horizontal and vertical Horizontal and vertical From 60 to 120 cm for a 34-40 dB gain Horizontal and vertical © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 145 .637-3 ITU-R F. Each frequency band is in turn divided into a number of frequency sub-bands. breaking it into channels. By defining frequency bands you can determine the operational limits of a microwave link network. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band. The default frequency bands supplied with Atoll are based on the F-series ITU-R recommendations: ITU-R Recommendation Frequency Band ITU-R F. In this chapter.747-0 ITU-R F. 5.1.595-8 ITU-R F.1 Long-Haul Frequency Band A long-haul frequency band operates within a range of 2 to 10 GHz and can cover a distance from 45 to 80 km.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands When planning a microwave link network.749-2 Usually the frequency bands can be divided into three types: • • • "Long-Haul Frequency Band" on page 145 "Medium-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146 "Short-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146. the length of the microwave link decreases. The following table gives details of long-haul frequency bands.748-4 ITU-R F. Frequency sub-bands are standardised.386-6 ITU-R F. Long-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading. 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 15 GHz 13 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz 5.1 Microwave Frequency Bands Microwave links operate within a high frequency range (2-58 GHz). Atoll enables you to define frequency bands and sub-bands.

ITU-compliant frequency bands. The Frequency Bands table appears (see Figure 5. Medium-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0. At 58 GHz.1 dB per km. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHza a.5-47. The following table gives details of medium-haul frequency bands.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands Microwave frequency bands are implemented in Atoll. 40 km 35 km 20 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Rain and multipath fading From 60 to 120 cm for a gain of 36.2 Medium-Haul Frequency Band A medium-haul frequency band operates within a range of 11 to 20 GHz and can cover a distance from 20 to 40 km.1 dB per km. The following table gives details of short-haul frequency bands.4-42. d. for rain of 20 mm per hour.1 dB per km. 5. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 23 GHza 26 GHz and 27 GHza 38 GHzb 55 GHzc 58 GHzd a. 5.94).1. and 27 GHz. Atoll includes several pre-defined. c. 26 GHz. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 1 dB per km. At 23 GHz. there is atmospheric attenuation of 5 dB per km. By default. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km.4 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-120 cm for a gain of 38-44 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-180 cm for a gain of 39-49 dB Horizontal and vertical At 18 GHz. for rain of 20 mm per hour as well as multipath fading. 146 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .3 Short-Haul Frequency Band A short-haul frequency band operates within a range of 23 to 58 GHz and can cover a distance up to 18 km. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder.1. There must be at least one frequency band that can be assigned to microwave links that are created. 2. Short-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading as well as rain fading (for the lower frequencies in the band). At 38 GHz. for rain of 20 mm per hour. the frequency band experiences atmospheric attenuation of 0.3 dB From 30 to 60 cm 30 cm for a gain of 39. for rain of 20 mm per hour. Select Frequencies > Frequency Bands from the context menu. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. At 23 GHz. At 55 GHz.66 dB 15 cm 15 cm Horizontal and vertical 15 km 10 km A few kilometers A few kilometers Horizontal and vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical b. there is multipath fading as well. for rain of 20 mm per hour. To create or modify a frequency band: 1. there is atmospheric attenuation of 12 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. The context menu appears. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0.Atoll User Manual 5. 3. 18 km Rain and multipath fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading From 30 to 120 cm for a gain of 35.

Note: The information necessary to define a frequency band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. These half-bands are referred to as upper and lower half-bands. You can define a channelisation plan for the lower and upper half-band of each sub-band. 2. Atoll automatically generates a channelisation plan or channel-to-frequency map using the information entered for the frequency sub-bands. Figure 5. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands Figure 5. A duplex link usually uses one of these half-bands in one direction and the other half-band in the other direction. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. The context menu appears. To create or modify a frequency sub-band: 1. A frequency sub-band has two half-bands. Comments: Any comments.95: The Frequency Sub-Bands table © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 147 . To create a frequency band. Max. 3. 5. Frequency sub-bands are standardised. Min. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band. The Frequency Sub-Bands table appears (see Figure 5. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency band. breaking it into channels. Frequency (MHz): The minimum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). Select Frequencies > Frequency Sub-Bands from the context menu.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands Frequency bands can be divided into a frequency sub-bands.94: The Frequency Bands table 4.95). Frequency (MHz): The maximum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). ITU-compliant divisions can have more than one frequency sub-band defined for a single frequency band. To modify a frequency band. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. ): 5.

Atoll User Manual 4. To create a frequency sub-band, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency sub-band. Frequency band: The name of the frequency band to which the sub-band belongs. Reference Frequency (MHz): The reference frequency (in MHz). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): The lower half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): The upper half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). First Channel: The first channel of the sub-band. Last Channel: The last channel of the sub-band. Step: The step between channels. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency sub-band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. ):

5. To modify a frequency sub-band, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

5.3.1

Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band
You can find the information necessary to create a frequency sub-band in the appropriate ITU-R recommendation. In this example, the recommendation R F.747-0 (for 10 GHz) is used. On the first page of ITU-R F.747-0 (see Figure 5.96), you see that the recommendation is for Frequency Band 10 GHz.

Figure 5.96: First page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 On page 2, you see the information in Figure 5.97:

Figure 5.97: Second page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 The information on page 2 of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 gives you the following values: • • • Reference Frequency (MHz): 11 701 MHz (the reference frequency is the central frequency of the sub-band). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1204 MHz Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1113 MHz Important: Remember to include the negative sign ("-") when defining the lower and upper half-band shifts. • • • • Inter-Channel Space (MHz): 7 MHz (as indicated by "+ 7m") First Channel: 1 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Last Channel: 12 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Step: 1 (as indicated by "The 12 values of m from 1 to 12)

148

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6
Managing Calculations in Atoll

Atoll User Manual

150

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6

Managing Calculations in Atoll
Once you have created microwave links, you can make predictions to study how well your network functions: • • • "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151 "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154 "Defining Calculation Parameters" on page 156.

6.1

Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects
The following propagation models are available in Atoll for use in microwave projects: • Microwave Propagation Model: The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.1.1

Working with the Microwave Propagation Model
The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. When calculating attenuation, the Microwave Propagation Model takes free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due to diffraction, and tropospheric losses into account. If you want to analyse a microwave link, a propagation model must be assigned to it, as explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave Propagation Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.98: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters: K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.

Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

151

Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i. you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class.e.Atoll User Manual Deygout Epstein-Peterson Deygout with correction Millington ITU 452-11 Full Deygout K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction. 90%. Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an Atoll-specific equation. ITU-R P. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate attenuation due to vegetation: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated.833-4 recommendations. For information on clutter categories.Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration. 7. Under Tropospheric Scatter. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Clutter categories are taken into consideration when studying reflections and must be defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile.99% of the time. Atoll multiplies the loss given by the selected method to calculate the tropospheric scatter loss. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. the clearance). It is not taken into account when calculating the total attenuation..Click OK. ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations. which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. see the Technical Reference Guide. Clutter categories are ITU-standardised clutter classes. N0: Enter the value for N0. 152 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Under Vegetation. The attenuation due to vegetation is calculated and displayed in link budget and interference reports for information only. 6. A1 and Alpha coefficients are used to calculate the maximum attenuation experienced by a transmitter or a receiver site located within a vegetation area. The maximum attenuation is taken into consideration to calculate the attenuation due to vegetation. Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model. ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%. Alpha: Enter the value of the Alpha coefficient.833-4: Attenuation will be calculated according to ITU-R P. Clutter categories: Select a clutter category for each clutter class. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. Figure 6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.99: Microwave Propagation Model Properties .99). see "Global Parameters" on page 156. A1: Enter the value of the A1 coefficient. or 99.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6.1.2

Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model
The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. It is an empirical model, but it takes more physical characteristics into consideration than the Microwave Propagation Model, which is why it is recommended for calculating interference. Assigning the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model to a microwave link is explained in in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.100: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under Reference attenuation not exceeded during the average year, you can set the following parameter: Required Time Percentage: Enter the percentage of time during which the global attenuation is not exceeded.

Under Rec. ITU-R P452 version, you can set the following parameter: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate the global attenuation (dB) between an interfering transmitter and an interfered (victim) receiver: ITU-R P.452-12 Simplified ITU-R P.452-8

6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.101).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

153

Atoll User Manual

Figure 6.101: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

7. Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.

6.2

Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives
In this section, the following are explained: • • "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154 "Defining Performance Objectives" on page 154.

6.2.1

Microwave Link Classes
Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types. Different link classes can use different performance objectives. By assigning microwave links to microwave link classes, you can assign the link classes targe parameters and usage limitations to the selected microwave links. To create or modify a microwave link class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Link Classes from the context menu. The Link Classes table appears. 4. Enter or modify the values in the table columns to create or modify a link class. Each link class has the following parameters: Name: The name of the link class Type: The type of link class (International or National) Sub-Class: The sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access, Intermediate country, etc.) Min and Max. L (M): The minimum and maximum length (in metres) for this link class.

The Atoll microwave module includes some pre-defined microwave links classes that are compliant with ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

6.2.2

Defining Performance Objectives
The ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performance events. As outlined in the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections; some error

154

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to the path or connection. These microwave error performance parameters are fully modelled in Atoll and include: • • • ESR SESR BBER

These error performance parameters are based on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error performance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections: • • • "Microwave Error Performance Events" on page 155 "Microwave Error Performance Parameters" on page 155 "The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives" on page 155.

Microwave Error Performance Events
Microwave error performance parameters are based on the following events: • • • Errored Block (EB): The EB is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits. Errored Second (ES): The ES is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. Severely Errored Second (SES): The SES is a one-second period with 30% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. Note: Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds can result in periods of unavailability, especially when there are no backup or standby procedures. Periods of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "failures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to the disconnection of switched services. The frequency of these events can be limited by limiting the SESR.

Background Block Error (BBE): The BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.

Microwave Error Performance Parameters
The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, the time for which the connection is deemed to be available (Savail) and the time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is in the available state. The parameters are: • • • Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ESR is the ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The BBER is the ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

In Atoll, you can define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance parameters. Atoll also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives based on the ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives
The performance objectives serve two main goals: • Performance objectives give the user of national and international digital networks an indication of the expected error performance under real operating conditions, thereby facilitating service planning and terminal equipment design. Performance objectives form the basis upon which performance standards are based for transmission equipment and systems in an ISDN connection.

Performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically feasible network, taking economic and technical constraints into consideration. The performance objectives, although expressed to suit the needs of different services, are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.

6.2.2.1

Defining Quality Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class in Atoll. Each quality objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant quality objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The performance objective equations define the behaviour of the quality parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Atoll includes by default the quality objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised quality objectives. To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create a new quality objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

155

Atoll User Manual 3. Select Performance Targets > Quality from the context menu. The Quality Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objective or create a new quality objective. To edit a ITU G.821 or ITU G.826 quality objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the quality objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.2.2.2

Defining Availability Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class inAtoll. Each availability objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant availability objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The availability objective equations define the behaviour of the availability parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each availability objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Note: The availability objectives are global objectives. They consist of three partial objectives as microwave link unavailability can be either due to rain, due to equipment failure, or random.

Atoll includes by default the availability objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised availability objectives. To modify pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create a new availability objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Performance Targets > Availability from the context menu. The Availability Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective or create a new availability objective. To edit a ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the availability objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.3

Defining Calculation Parameters
In a microwave project, parameters that affect calculations can be divided into: • • Global parameters: Global parameters are defined for all microwave links and affect all links. For information on setting global parameters, see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Link parameters: Link parameters are defined per link and affect individual links. For information on setting link parameters, see "Link Parameters" on page 159.

As well, any parameters set for the propagation model affect calculations: • • Microwave Propagation Model: For information on setting Microwave Propagation Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: For information on setting Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.3.1

Global Parameters
The global properties of a microwave links project are defined for all microwave links in the Properties of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The global parameters are those used for: • • • Quality and availability analysis Objective selection Interference calculation.

To define the global parameters for microwave links: for quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears.

156

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

B >> A. Worst channel engineering: If you select Worst channel engineering. Under Result filtering. you can enter the percentage of the interfered bandwidth that Atoll should consider when searching for interferers.e.. the channel with the lowest margin). Values defined for each link: If you select Values defined for each link. Same value for all links: If you select this option. 6. - Under BER. Calculated Port: Under Calculated Port. if you keep the default value of 250%. On the Models tab.. Threshold Degradation: Enter the minimum degradation threshold. 5. Correlation Area: Enter the surface in km2 of the correlation area. Power control on the useful signal: Select the Power control on the useful signal check box if power control on the transmitted signal is to be considered. This option is useful if you have links with 2+0 configuration (i. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the result for the channel specified individually for Site A and Site B.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 4. you can define the following options: Calculate BER1: Select Calculate BER1 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER1 value. Click the Interference tab. Ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver. you can define the following parameters: Min. On the General tab. select which channel should be displayed the results of a link analysis: All: If you select All. Atoll performs the link analysis using the values for BER1 and BER2 defined in the properties of each link. Click the Models tab.g. Same value for all links: If you select Same value for all links. Calculation Details: Select the interference to be displayed in the results: none. No Filter: There is no filter and all sites within the maximum distance are considered as interferers. Atoll performs the link analysis for each channel and displays the results for the worst channel in terms of margin (i. or both. and interference calculation. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 157 . the value you enter will be used as the K factor for all links in link analyses. you can define the following parameters: The link direction to be analysed: Select the link direction to be analysed: either A >> B. the parameters you define will be used for interference calculation. a site will be considered as an interferer when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed 2. Under Interferer Filtering. Under Results. you can define a value for BER 1 and BER 2 that Atoll will use for all links. the parameters you define will be used for quality and availability analysis. objective selection.e. Results that do not meet the threshold will not be displayed. - Note: - Interference via repeaters: Select how interference caused by repeaters should be taken into consideration. a median value for the K factor will be used for each link in link analyses. you can define the following parameters: K factor: Select the K factor (the earth curvature factor) to be used in link analyses: Median value for each link: If you select this option. two links between the same two sites). You can choose from the following options: Co-channel Only: Only co-channel sites are considered as interferer sites. parallel links are referred to as links sharing the same link extremities (e. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the results for all channels. Under Calculation Parameters. Therefore. you can define the following parameters: Power Control: Define whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on. Interfered Bandwidth: Define which sites are to be considered as interferers. Calculate BER2: Select Calculate BER2 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER2 value..5 times the interfered bandwidth. the parameters you define are valid for all types of analyses: quality and availability analysis. Ignore interference between channels of a same link: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore interference generated by channels of the same link on each other. on the uplink or downlink. Distance: Enter the maximum distance in metres that Atoll will search around each site to find potentially interfering sites. User-defined Percentage: If you select this option. you can define the following parameters: Max. or on both the uplink and downlink. Click the General tab. It also applies to parallel links. On the Interference tab. Specific port engineering: If you select Specific port engineering. links with two channels). Under Calculation Parameters. No IRF graph is taken into account when the Co-channel Only option is selected. Atoll considers co-channel interference when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed the interfered bandwidth. In this context. always off or is to be calculated according to geometric correlation.

Therefore.821 or ITU-T G. 20°C D: medium dry ground E: very dry ground F: pure water. Distance: Under K. 530-11 and 530-12) are available. ITU-R P. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate availability. ITU-R P. you can define how quality and availability objectives are selected. Rain Model: Select the model to be used to calculate rain attentuation. or it can be random. Multipath Occurence: If you select recommendation ITU-R P. to equipment failure. Vegetation without leaves: Select the Vegetation without leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones without foliage. Method. Reduction of XPD is taken into consideration when calculating unavailability due to multi-path and unavailability due to rain whereas signal enhancements have an impact on unavailability due to multi-path only. Under Performance Objectives Selection. ITU-R P. Click the Objectives tab. If you select a method based on one of the ITU-R P.826 recommendations or a customised objective). 20°C B: wet ground C: fresh water. ITU-R P. the parameters you define will select objectives.530-12. Erroneous Blocks: Under Erroneous Blocks you can define athe network level consideration values for the Residual Bit Error Rate (RBER). Clicking the Browse button ( ) beside the Quality or Availability field opens a dialogue where you can define a priority for each selection criterion. ITU-R P. you can define the following parameters: Reflective: Select the Reflective check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as relection areas.1058-2 and their characteristics. The objectives can be selected according to the microwave link rate and the type of the objective (from ITU-T G. 527-3. ITU-R P. number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES and for Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER. Soil type: Select the type of ground as defined in Rec. The type of ground is used to determine permittivity and conductivity values taken into account in reflection analysis.530 recommendations. For each clutter category. 530-8. 838-1 and 838-3) are available. you can set the following parameters: Multi-Path Propagation: Under Multi-Path Propagation.530 recommendations under Method.530-10.530-8. 530-5. 8. Click the Clutter Categories tab. This tab lists all clutter categories defined in Rec. These weights are taken into consideration when calculating the performance objectives to be considered when analysing the microwave link unavailability due to rain and the unavailability due to equipment failures.530-12. or ITU-R P. - Under Quality. Method: If you selected K. you can set the following parameters: Frequency Exponent: Under K. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate quality: Vigants-Barnett. K. or ITU-R P. define the distance.Q. Two attenuation models for rain (ITU recommendations. you can use either a simplified method or a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K). 530-10.Q. select the Ignore Signal Enhancements check box if you want to ignore signal enhancements and XPD reduction in multi-path propagation. Six availability analysis methods (Crane and those based on different implemented ITU recommendations. 158 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .530-11. Under Availability Objectives Apportionment. you can define the ratio between the different objectives considered in the global availability objective. On the Clutter Categories tab. 7. Method. On the Objectives tab. K. Microwave link unavailability can be due either to rain (with its impact on propagation).Q.Q. The following are the available types of ground: A: sea water (average salinity). define the exponent of the frequency.Q factor. Click OK.530. you can either enter the geoclimatic factor (K) value or use a simplified method or use a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K). Vegetation with leaves: Select the Vegetation with leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones with foliage. ITU-R P. the parameters you define will be used to analyse reflection and calculate vegetation losses. method based under Method. Selective Fadings: Under Selective Fadings you can define reference delay values for the secondary signal t (tau) for minimum and non minimum phase conditions. you can set further parameters under ITU-R P.530-10.530: If you selected a method based on one of the ITU-R P.530-11.Atoll User Manual Under Availability.530-5. ITU-R P. 20°C G: ice (fresh water) - 9. If you select Vigants-Barnett. the global availability objective consists of three partial objectives for which you can define a weight.

Right-click the link for which you want to set the calculation parameters. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 159 . PL percentage. ) to expand the Links folder.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link You set the calculation parameters for a microwave link on three tabs of the link’s Properties dialogue: the Geoclimatic tab. For an explanation of the options available on the General. Reliability parameters: The reliability parameters define the quality and availability of the microwave link. Radio. and Display. 6. and Propagation tabs and are described here. earth curvature factor (k). Connections. 5. temperature. • • • The link parameters which affect calculations can be defined for a single microwave link and then applied to all microwave links or to a group of microwave links that share the same characteristics.102). The margin calculated by the propagation model defined for the useful signal is also used to calculate the quality and availability of the microwave link. Reliability. The microwave link Properties dialogue has several tabs: General. Select Properties from the context menu. Under ideal circumstances a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. Link class: Each link class can have different performance objectives. To define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link: 1. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. water vapour density. Connections. If no propagation model is defined for the useful link.3. The Properties dialogue appears. and the Propagation tab. Defining calculation parameters is explained in the following sections: • • • "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159 "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163 "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links" on page 165. rain intensity (exceeding 0. Click the Geoclimatic tab (see Figure 6.2. you assign the performance objectives to the link.3. Propagation parameters: A propagation can optionally be defined to calculate the useful signal and the interfering signal. Radio.01% of time).Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 6. In practice. Propagation. For information on creating a link class. the target values for quality and availability as defined in the link class are used. this performance level is never achieved due to continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems with the equipment. including climatic factor. The context menu appears. Reliability. see "Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management".2 Link Parameters The link parameters which affect calculations are the following: • Geoclimatic parameters: The geoclimatic parameters define the environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 2. Geoclimatic. 4. Note: You can also access a link’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. and Display tabs. 6. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. the Reliability tab. Click the Expand button ( 3. The link settings that affect calculations are on the Geoclimatic.

Geoclimatic tab 7. On the Geoclimatic tab. you can select the following climatic zones: Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as quality calculation method. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. Temperate and Dry. click the Display All button under Current Methods. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature 160 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can define climate-related settings affecting the microwave link: Current Methods: Under Current Methods. Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. To access all geoclimatic parameters independently of the methods you have selected.Atoll User Manual Figure 6. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.102: Microwave link Properties dialogue . you can choose between Warm and Humid. you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability.

01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. you can choose between "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. you can define the PL factor.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre.530-12. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. for the K.Q. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P. - - - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 161 . ITU-R P.01% of the average year (or. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. If you select User-defined under Multipath Occurence. 530-5 or Rec. ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. ITU-R P. Rec. or based on Rec.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0.530: Under ITU-R P. Rec. you can select the Terrain Type. you can enter the C factor value.99% of the average year). Refractivity: Under Refractivity. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec.01% of the average year based on Rec. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method.835-3 (and select a season).530 are those recommended by ITU-R P.Q.530-5. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. ITU-R P. Under Refractivity.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. -8: Under ITU-R P.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec. Method.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded).Q method. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. you can define K. calculated using the set parameters. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. Method: Under K.530-5.530-8 calculation methods. ITU-R P.453-9. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll based on Rec.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. ITU-R P. -8. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. the rainfall observed 99. or "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. using a userdefined reference altitude. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps.530. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. ITU-R P. Under Geoclimatic Factor. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you select whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account.530-5. K. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. the propagation condition factor for the VigantsBarnett method.1510-0. ITU-R P. is displayed. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. the k factor median value. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. ITU-R P. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. Finally. if you select Terrain-based Method. you can choose between "Flat Terrain". -8 and Vigants-Barnett. in other words. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. you can define the K factor.530: The parameters found under Rec.530-5. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km.839-3 (and select a season). "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water.Q. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file.530-12: Under ITU-R P. ITU-R P.836-3. Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. If you select Simplified Method.835-3 (and select a season).530-5 and ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season). K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P. ITU-R P. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone. ITU-R P. If you are using ITU-R P. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. Rainfall exceeded 0..530-5 or 530-8 methods. ITU-R P.

For information on creating a link class. If the value for BER that you enter is not defined in the properties of the equipment. Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2.Atoll User Manual 8. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. Atoll will interpolate to determine the corresponding sensitivity. Click the Reliability tab (see Figure 6. The MTTR is taken into account when calculating unavailability due to failures if the microwave link is not equipped with a hot standby channel system. you can set the MTTR (mean time to repair). Availability: Under Availability. 10. Figure 6.104). On the Reliability tab. Each link class can have different performance objectives. 162 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can select the link class. Click the Propagation tab (see Figure 6.103). you can define reliability-related parameters: Link Class: Under Link Class. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. you assign the performance objectives to the link. Atolldisplays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class.Reliability tab 9.103: Microwave link Properties dialogue .

Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal. To copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links: 1.104: Microwave link Properties dialogue. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. Select Open Table from the context menu. Click OK.2. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links. To define the calculation parameters for all microwave links: 1. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. You can set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links at the same time by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links. 5. you can define propagation-related parameters: Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 2. If no propagation model is selected. in a highly homogeneous network.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6.Propagation tab 11. 4.3. 6. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. The Links Table appears. - 12. 2. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. Right-click the Links folder. 3. Copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: © Forsk 2010 Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 163 . for example. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159. On the Propagation tab. In the Links Table. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. 7. b. Select Edit > Fill > Up. copy the values into the cells below the modified cell: 164 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the modified cell. c. copy the values into all cells above the modified cell: a.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 6.Atoll User Manual PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. 8. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells above the modified microwave link. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.

2. in a network that spans a great distance. The microwave links in the folder are grouped in separate folders by that property. for example. b. Grouping Microwave Links To select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by grouping: 1.3. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 165 . Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. 4. sorting the microwave links according to their common attributes. From the Group By submenu.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll a. Select Edit > Fill > Down. Select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by: Grouping the microwave links (see "Grouping Microwave Links" on page 165) Sorting the microwave links (see "Sorting Microwave Links" on page 166) Filtering the microwave links (see "Filtering Microwave Links" on page 168) 3. Copy the defined calculation parameters to the selected group of microwave links. 6. c. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. Click the modified cell. Right-click the Links folder. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells below the modified microwave link. 2. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159. You can set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links but not for all links. The context menu appears. select the property by which you want to group the microwave links. Ensure that you chose a property that all the microwave links you want to modify and the link with the modified calculation parameters have in common. 9. and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links in that group. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 2. To define the calculation parameters for a group of microwave links: 1. 3.

Right-click the table column with the parameter you want to sort on. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. The context menu appears. For information on using the dialogue that appears. The Links Table appears. you can ungroup the links by right-clicking the Links folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. Right-click the folder with the grouped microwave links. Right-click the Links folder. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. copy the values into all cells in the group above the modified cell: a. Sorting Microwave Links To sort the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. Select Open Table from the context menu. 7. 5. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. 6. Once you have finished copying the calculation parameters. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. 6. The Links Table appears. 4. The context menu appears. In the Links Table. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. 7. Click the modified cell. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. 2.Atoll User Manual Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 166 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 8. b. 5. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. Select Open Table from the context menu. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll c. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells in the group above the modified microwave link. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Select Edit > Fill > Up. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. b. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 167 . 9. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Click the modified cell. d. copy the values into the cells in the group below the modified cell: a. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. 10. Select Edit > Fill > Down. c.

You can now filter on a value in the table. The context menu appears.Atoll User Manual The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. You can either use a value that all microwave links to which you want to copy calculation parameters have in common with the microwave link you previously modified. Figure 6. Right-click the cell and select one of the following from the context menu: Filter by Selection: All microwave links with the selected value or values are displayed.105 on page 168). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Filtering Microwave Links To filter the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. 6. You can now modify these microwave links as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 6. Right-click the Links folder. press CTRL as you click the other values. Select Open Table from the context menu. To select more than one value. Filter Excluding Selection: All microwave links without the selected value or values are displayed.106 on page 169). Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. 4.105: Filtering by selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. 2. The Links Table appears. Select the value to filter on. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire Links table(see Figure 6. 5. 220 MHz) 168 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or you can use a value these microwave links do not have.

see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 169 .106: Filtering excluding selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. 220 MHz) Note: You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. 7. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6. For more information on advanced filtering.

Atoll User Manual 170 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 7 Microwave Link Project Management .

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7

Microwave Link Project Management
The microwave links module enables you to plan, design, and analyse microwave link networks. Using Atoll's microwave links module, microwave link networks can be designed and analysed in separate Atoll projects as well as within 2G (GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects. Using Atoll's microwave links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio equipment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. You can define and set target performance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, defining the quality and availability targets. You can determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or over a hub with several links (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference analyses, and frequency planning. Atoll also enables you to design your microwave link networks while taking future growth and enhancements into consideration. Comprehensive analysis features in the Atoll microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-tomultipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies the required quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link's robustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number of failures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteria are described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. Atoll follows these standards and enables the user to set in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed. Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight be available, i.e., that there be a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it moves away from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take this dispersion into account and attention should be paid to objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referred to as "Fresnel Zone" clearance. Atoll's profile analysis feature permits allows you to view the line of sight, Fresnel zone clearance, and reflective surfaces along the link's profile. Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sight connection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link. Atoll fully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a microwave link. Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled. Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in Atoll is divided into two folders on the Data tab of the Explorer window: • • The Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can also contain sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects. The Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the definitions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. Each link refers to at least two separate sites in the Sites folder.

7.1

Designing a Microwave Link Network
Figure 7.107 depicts the process of creating and planning a microwave link network. The steps involved in planning a microwave link network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 7.107. 1. Open an existing microwave link document or create a new one ( 1 ). You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. You can create a new Atoll document as explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".

2. Configure the microwave link network by defining network parameters ( 2 ). You can define the equipment such as antennas, waveguides, and cables used in the network (see "Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment") You define and modify microwave frequency bands (see "Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Subbands").

3. Add sites and carry out basic evaluations of the candidate sites and locate more suitable locations for candidate sites ( 3 ). You can add sites or modify existing ones (see "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175). You can evaluate the location of existing sites (see "Site Survey Tools" on page 176) and search for new candidate sites (see "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184).

4. Create microwave links between sites ( 4 ). You can create a microwave link (see "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188) based on a link template. If necessary , you can modify the template on which new links are based (see "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190). If necessary, you can create repeaters along microwave links between sites. You can create multi-hop microwave links ("Creating Multi-hops" on page 208).

-

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

173

Atoll User Manual 5. Analyse the microwave network. You can analyse the path profile (see "Analysing the Path Profile" on page 193), adding passive repeaters if necessary (see "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201) ( 5 ). You can analyse the quality and reliability of the network (see "Analysing Microwave Link Reliability" on page 203) ( 6 ). You can study reflection along the microwave link profile (see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) ( 7 ). You can interference along the microwave link profile (see "Analysing Interference" on page 221) ( 8 ).

6. Plan link channels ( 9 ) "Planning Microwave Link Channels" on page 216.

Optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases, the last four steps can be repeated in order to achieve the optimum solution for the network. 7. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( 10 ). After modifying the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps 7 and 8 again.

Figure 7.107: Planning a microwave link network - workflow

7.2

Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites
As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project", you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point supporting one or more microwave links. Atoll enables you to verify the characteristics of each candidate in order to chose the best site. Additionally, Atoll has tools that allow you to search for new locations for sites. In this section, the following are explained: • • • "Creating Sites" on page 174 "Site Survey Tools" on page 176 "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184.

7.2.1

Creating Sites
When you create a microwave site, you create only the geographical point. The created site can then support one or more microwave links. In this section, the following are described: • • "Site Description" on page 175 "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175.

174

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7.2.1.1

Site Description
The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab (see Figure 7.108):

Figure 7.108: New Site dialogue Name: Atoll enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site. Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want. Pylon Height: You can define the height of the structure on which you can install antennas. Atoll can use this height in several analyses (site analysis, antenna height optimisation, etc.). Support Type: You can describe the nature of site. This field is for information only.

-

The Pylon tab:

7.2.1.2

Creating or Modifying a Site
You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 175, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.108 on page 175). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.

c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 175. 4. Click OK.

Tip:

If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

175

Atoll User Manual

7.2.2

Site Survey Tools
Atoll provides several tools to enable you to evaluate the line of sight around a site or between candidate sites. In this section, the following are explained. • • • • • "Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site" on page 176 "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176 "Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites" on page 179 "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180 "Displaying a 360° View Around One Site" on page 181

7.2.2.1

Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site
Atoll allows you to display the line-of-sight area around a site in the map window. To display the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears. 3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the following parameters: Max Distance: Enter the maximum distance around the selected site that should be taken into consideration. Site Height: Enter the transmitter site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Receiver Height: Enter the receiver site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Factor k: Enter a value for the earth curvature factor.

4. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and define the following: Frequency: Enter the operating frequency you want to study. Clearance: Enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.

5. Under View, define the display parameters of the line-of-sight area: To set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, move the slider. To define a colour for the displayed line-of-sight area, click the Colour button and select a colour from the palette that appears.

6. Click OK. Atoll calculates and displays the line-of-sight area around the selected site. To delete the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete Line of Sight Area from the context menu.

7.2.2.2

Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites
In Atoll, you can analyse the line of sight (LOS) between candidate sites. The analysis can be done for one particular site if one extremity of the microwave link is already locked or for all sites. In the analysis, Atoll considers the selected site(s) and all sites located within the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. For information on the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. To calculate a LOS report for one particular site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 7.109).

176

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

Figure 7.109: Setting the calculation parameters for a line of sight report 3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight analysis. 6. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 7. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

8. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

9. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. a. Click Add. The Field Selection dialogue appears. b. In the Field Selection dialogue, select the fields that you want to display in the report. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. To select a field to be included in the report, select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom.

c. Click OK to return to the Table tab. 10. Click OK. Atoll displays the selected results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

177

Atoll User Manual The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Distance (m): The distance between the sites. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. The result can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.110). Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. Antenna 1 Height (m): The height of the transmitting antenna. Antenna 2 Height (m):The height of the receiving antenna. Frequency (MHz): The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. Direction (°): The angle from Site1 to Site2 in the horizontal plane.

-

Figure 7.110: Line of sight clearance

Tip:

If you double-click one terrain section in the Line of Sight Report table, Atoll will automatically center it in the map and will display its profile in the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.

You can remove the line-of-sight sections by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the site’s context menu. To calculate a LOS report for all sites: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

6. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. 7. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 8. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

9. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

178

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

7. If you want. b. Maximum Number of Hops: The maximum number of hops allowed between starting and target sites. 5. if no focus zone is defined. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. The routes can consist of several hops and have different lengths.2. To find the best route between two sites: 1. Atolllists all sites in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for information on the focus zone. Antenna 1 Height: The height of the transmitting antenna. define the following parameters: Source Site: The starting site. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Atoll considers the selected sites and all sites located within the focus zone. To change the order of the fields. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7. define the first k factor value. Frequency: The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. The result can be between -100 and 100%. i. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. As well.2. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone.110). On the Routing Options tab. Distance: The distance between the sites. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. Under Earth Curvature Factors. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Click OK to return to the Table tab. - 4. Click the Table tab. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Atoll can display the route with the least of hops or the shortest route. Click OK. i.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 10. 6. 11. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. select the fields that you want to display in the report. Right-click the target site either on the map. Antenna 2 Height: The height of the receiving antenna. Minimise the total path length: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of distance. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 179 . a. Minimise the number of hops to reach the target: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of number of hops. Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. the shortest path. The Field Selection dialogue appears. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value.e. or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. In the analysis. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. 7. To select a field to be included in the report.Transmitter Side and Height . Select Routing from the context menu. 3. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. from top to bottom. the path containing the least of hops. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites Atoll allows you to find all routes between two sites fulfilling line-of-sight criteria. The context menu appears. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. - You can remove the line-of-sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Under Height . Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Click Add. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.e. For information on the focus zone. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. 2. c. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. Atoll will use the computation zone. In the Field Selection dialogue. Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176. Atoll will use the pylon height defined on each site. Atoll displays terrain sections on the map between each site of routes (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). 4. indicating it is selected. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. You can open the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting Properties. The profile between both sites appears on the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Atoll considers the pylon heights defined for the selected sites to determine the profile. 7. Note: You can set further options using the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class: If you select Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class. Click the Clutter tab. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue.Atoll User Manual 8. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. Under Penetration Condition. Default Antenna Height: If you select Default Antenna Height. Select how pylon height will be defined on both sites of the microwave link by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting one of the following: - Antenna Height Defined by Site: If you select Antenna Height Defined by Site. you can check the terrain profile between two microwave sites. Move the pointer to the site on the map. Distance: The length of the route. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between both sites. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Clearance: If you want. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. 2. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. Then.2. b. When the frame appears around the site. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. For a description of the options available in the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. define the following parameters: a. The number of columns named "Node#" displayed in the Routing to Site table depends on the maximum number of hops defined in the Routing Options tab. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. 10. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. For each clutter class. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. You can modify them as well as the studied frequency in the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. In addition. When the frame appears around the site. The Routing to Site table contains the following information for each route. indicating it is selected. To study the terrain profile between two microwave sites: 1. Node#: The name of sites been through by the route and the name of the target site. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class.2. 9. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). The context menu appears. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. click to create the second analysis point. 3. 5. 6. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. 180 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Node1: The name of the source site selected in the Routing Options tab. click to create the first analysis point. Click OK.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites In Atoll. Atoll displays the results in the Routing to Site table. By default. Right-click the Terrain Section tab. Move the pointer to another site on the map.

Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Terrain Sections folder and select Properties from the context menu. Pylon 1 Height (m): The pylon height on Site1 to be considered. Right-click the site either directly on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. - 9. its properties are based on the selected link template. To perform a 360° view at any site: 1. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 2. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. On the map. Select Properties. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. In the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. Pylon 2 Height (m): The pylon height on Site2 to be considered. right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design. Atoll adds the new microwave link in the Links folder. Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone. you have the following parameters: Id: The terrain section reference number. Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. In order to calculate the Fresnel ellipsoid. Site2: The Site2 name. The value can vary between -100 and 100%. Atoll uses the site heights. If you have several terrain sections displayed on the map. Distance (m): The distance between Site1 and Site2. Displaying 360° view around a site helps you to determine if the site is a good candidate and if it is visible from the other sites. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. 4. click the terrain section you want to analyse.2.2. The 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. the k factor value and the frequency used for the LOS report calculation. Site1: The Site1 name. Select the Display tab and define the following parameters: Under Display Type. 1.111): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 181 . 2. proceed as follows: 1. 3. Then. 2. On the map. and terrain height and clutter along the profile. Click OK to close the dialogue and apply the parameters. It displays a Fresnel ellipsoid between both sites." Under Field. select "Value Intervals. If you have previously calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176). 1. you can use any terrain section to create a microwave link. 7. select "Visibility". 8. 3. For information on changing display properties. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. Frequency (MHz): The frequency to be considered. 2.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site You can display a 360° view around each site. Click OK. Atoll opens the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Select 360° View from the context menu. The context menu appears. you can colour them according to the percentage of clearance/ penetration of the Fresnel zone. You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour.

111: 360° View Tool The 360° View tab shows the points of highest elevations in every direction around the selected site. To get information about a high elevation point: Place the mouse cursor on a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. The altitude (in m). The 360° View tab provides you with the following options: To center the receiver site in the map window: Click the site in the 360° View tab. - To display the terrain profile between the studied site and the receiver site: Right-click the site in the 360° View tab and select See Terrain Section from the context menu. Each neighbour site is indicated by a vertical red line and its symbol. To view the exact location of a high elevation point in the map window: Click a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab.e. The Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens. the visible part is represented by a solid line whereas the hidden part is indicated by a dotted line. The pylon height (in m). To return from the Terrain Section tab to the 360° View tab: Click the 360° View tab in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. - 182 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the line is solid. This representation helps you select a receiver site among neighbours and determine at which height you should install an antenna on the receiver site. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The point coordinates (in the display coordinate system). The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the direction (in °) on the horizontal axis. The line position on the vertical axis depends on the site altitude which includes the Earth curvature. Note: The 360° View tab does not display any depth of field. the maximum height not to be exceeded if you install an antenna on the site) defined for the studied site. The direction (in °). The curvature of the Earth (in m). If the site is entirely visible from the studied site.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. The line lengths and the symbol position on the line depend on the receiver height defined in the 360° View Properties dialogue. if a site is partly visible from the studied site. Neighbour sites around the studied one are displayed according to their directions. A special pointer ( ) pinpoints the location of the current point in the map window. the line is dotted. Finally. The direction (in °). Two purple markers on both sides of the 360° View tab show the pylon height (i. To get information about a receiver site: Place the mouse cursor on the site in the 360° View tab. If it is entirely hidden by an obstable. The distance from the studied site (in m). Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The site coordinates (in the display coordinate system). The height of the studied site is indicated by a blue dotted line. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. Its distance from the studied site (in m). The site is automatically selected and centered in the map window.

Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. Each site is indicated by a vertical line (red by default). Atoll displays the position of other sites within the view. For each clutter class. 2. Azimuth: Enter the azimuth of the selected site. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. Then. Atoll displays two markers on both sides of the window to represent the pylon height defined for the studied site. 6. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. 9. b. define the following parameters: a. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 183 . 4. To configure the 360° view calculation parameters and display options: Right-click the 360° View tab and select 360° View Properties from the context menu. . - - Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters 1. If you enter a beamwidth of 90° and an azimuth of 0°. Clearance: If you want. Under Penetration Condition. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Under Height . Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. For information on parameters which can be changed. respectively. 10. define the first k factor value. Height of the Selected Site: When you select this option. : Rotate the angle of view on the left. On the Display tab. Right-click the 360° view tab. you can define the following parameters: Pylon Height: When you select this option. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Position of the Other Sites: When you select this option. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight.The altitude (in m). : Decrease the angle of view on the left. Click OK. : Increase the angle of view on the left. They are displayed in purple by default. Click the Clutter tab.Transmitter Side and Height . Select 360° View Properties from the context menu. 5. : Decrease the angle of view on the right : Rotate the angle of view on the right. 8. To change the angle of view and the azimuth of the studied site: Click the following buttons available on both sides of the 360° View tab.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management . you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). The context menu appears. : Increase the angle of view on the right. 3.The curvature of the Earth (in m). 7. . Under Earth Curvature Factors. Atoll will display the view between -45° and 45°. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.The clutter height at the point (in m). define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site. see “Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters” on page 183. Atoll displays a horizontal line (a blue dotted line by default) to indicate the height of the selected site. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Beamwidth: Enter the angle of view to be considered.

selecting a colour from the palette. 9. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. 10.2. Overlapping: Select Overlapping to display the line-of-sight areas with coverage from the defined number of sites: 184 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site. you can set the following: Receiver Height: If you want. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. You can select one of the following display options: One Area per Site: Select One Area per Site to display a line-of-sight area for each site and then define the colour the line-of-sight areas will be displayed in: Automatic Colour: If you select Automatic Colour. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. you can define a receiver height for each clutter class. On the Display tab. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box. 3. Unique Colour: If you select Unique Colour. by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. You can also let Atoll display the mutually visible areas of multiple sites so as to find good places to create new sites. by moving the slider. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. you can select how receiver height will be defined at the far edge of the LOS area: Use heights defined per clutter class: If you select Use heights defined per clutter class. Displaying the Mutually Visible Areas of Multiple Sites Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight areas for several sites and display their intersection. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. You can improve the location of a site. Atoll with display all line-of-sight areas in the same colour. c. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Right-click the Sites folder. - 11. Define the type of clearance that will be calculated by selecting one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. 6. Clearance: If you want. and the resulting display will show the cumulative line-of-sight areas. you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter side of each microwave link: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. Under Height . b. 8. Click the Clutter tab. 2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. in terms of reception and transmission. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. Under Earth Curvature Factors. you can define how the line-of-sight areas will be displayed on the map. The intersection of lineof-sight areas will be calculated for sites in the computation zone (for information on the computation zone. 7.Atoll User Manual 7. as explained in "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. Atoll will use the receiver height you define in the Default Height box. The context menu appears.Receiver Side on the Calculation Parameters tab. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Atoll will automatically assign a different colour to each line-of-sight area. Set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area. This is the value that will be taken into consideration if you selected Use heights defined per clutter class under Height . Click the Display tab. Under Height . To display the line-of-sight areas of several sites and display their intersection: 1. For each clutter class. and you will be able to distinguish the line-of-sight areas for each site. define the first k factor value. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. define the following parameters: a.3 Search Tools for New Sites Atoll provides different tools to find new microwave site locations. 5.Transmitter Side. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class.Receiver Side. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. Under Penetration Condition. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line-of-sight area.

transceiver equipment. Repeater Q: The name of a second passive repeater on the link. In this section. occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the modulation scheme used. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna positions. 7. In Atoll. X and Y.. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300 MHz and 60 GHz. Length: The calculated length. 2. Areas covered by all sites: Check the Areas covered by all sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by all sites in the colour selected from the palette. Dx and Dy. Areas covered by at least 3 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 3 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 3 sites in the colour selected from the palette. "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190. respectively. see "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29. X and Y. A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna positions as offsets with respect to the site location. Activity: The microwave link activity status. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Areas covered by at least 2 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 2 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 2 sites in the colour selected from the palette. containing the user data. in Atoll. Under Site B: you can set the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the options defined on the Display tab to the Legend. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end. 13. Under Site A: you can set the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. A site can support one or more microwave links or passive repeaters. Atoll enables you to manage the microwave link parameters and their activity status globally or individually. Atoll enables you to create new microwave links by basing them on templates or by setting all the parameters for each new link. Repeater P: The name of a passive repeater on the link. and is transmitted over the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. The baseband signal. To delete the line-of-sight areas: 1. The Properties dialogue has seven tabs: • The General tab: Name: The name of the microwave link. Click OK.3 Creating Microwave Links A microwave radio link. Only active microwave links are considered in reliability and interference analysis. Select Delete Line of Sight Areas from the context menu. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. respectively. "Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links" on page 192. "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies. Comments: Any comment about the microwave link. is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex mode. Dx and Dy. The Radio tab: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 185 . "Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template" on page 190. Atoll displays results on the map. "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. etc. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. one for transmission and one for reception. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. • Frequency band: The working frequency band of the microwave link. For information on the Legend window. The context menu appears. "Checking Data Consistency" on page 192. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 192.3.1 Definition of a Microwave Link The parameters of a microwave link can be found in the microwave link’s Properties dialogue. 12. "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival. installed at both. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. respectively. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. respectively. 7. "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188.

Port Settings: Click the Port Settings button to configure channel(s) in detail. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. If you want. values for transmission and reception attenuation. the appearance of the button changes Under Equipment. Separation: The distance between the main and the diversity antennas when space diversity is used on the site. you can define the following parameters: - - • The Connections tab: Under Waveguides and Cables. the appearance of the button changes ( ). radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. This parameter can be defined for biderectional links only. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Atoll lists equipment that operates in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. Polarisation: The polarisation of the antenna to be used. or for both transmission and reception directions and select the waveguide model.e. Maximum Power: The maximum power that the equipment can transmit. If you want. you can define antennas and characteristics for the both sites of the link Model: The antenna model. The value cannot exceed the Max ATPC value defined for the equipment. transmission and reception port numbers. the appearance of the button changes ( ). Half-band: Define which half-band (either the upper or the lower half-band) is assigned to the site. Atoll proposes in the list equipment compatible with the selected antenna as defined in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. Frequency: The frequency on which the signal is transmitted. Atoll lists all frequency sub-bands available for the microwave link frequency band. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the - - antenna model field. Atoll lists antennas that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. Height/Ground: The antenna height with respect to the ground (in metres). Atoll proposes in the list antennas compatible with the selected equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Equipment Compatibility table. - Under Frequencies. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the frequency sub-band field. In this case. If you want. it equals the central frequency of the frequency band. In this case./Direct Ray: The tilt with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. If you want. Under Antennas. Select both options to make the microwave link bidirectional (i. When the filter is active. This parameter is taken from the equipment properties. You can configure the channels.Atoll User Manual A>>B and B>>A: The direction of the microwave link (A>>B: transmission from Site A to Site B. the polarisation and the channel port status. When the filter is active. For further information on port settings. By default. Az. to allow communication in both ways). or frequency diversity. Sub-Band: The frequency sub-band. you can select up to two waveguides. By default.. Tuning: Define a value different from 0 dB if you do not want to transmit at maximum power. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( model field. Note: Ports have to be configured if you use dual polarized antennas. When the filter is active. Diversity Ant: You can define if a diversity antenna is used at either site to improve reception. whose frequency spacing corresponds to the standardised channel bandwidth calculated for the installed equipment. Atoll proposes 186 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For each of them. By default. For information on taking power control into consideration. In this case. Tilt. For other configurations. In this case. port settings is not mandatory. you can define equipment related parameters for the both sites of the link: - ( ). This parameter helps Atoll determine which antenna pattern diagrams to use for calculations./Direct Ray: The azimuth with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. Coordinated Power: The output power taken into account in calculations when power control is on. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m (where "n" is the number of channels in normal use and "m" is the number of channels available as standby channels). see "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. Channel(s) can be selected only after choosing a frequency sub-band. the appearance of the button changes ( ) beside the antenna ). XPIC System: Select this option if the microwave link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Canceller). By default. This value is used when no sub-band is defined. Atoll provides in the list the sub-band. By default. Model: You can select a piece of equipment. B>>A: transmission from Site B to Site A). ATPC value is considered in reliability and interference analysis only if power control is on. ATPC: The power reserve used to increase the transmitted signal when it rains. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. you can define either the frequency or the sub-band and channels. Channels: The channel(s) allocated to the site. Nominal power: The output power after tuning. you can define if it is used either for transmission or reception only. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the antenna model field. When the filter is active.

Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature based on Rec. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0.835-3 (and select a season). ITU-R P. the rainfall observed 99. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. ITU-R P. Temperate and Dry.530-12. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. ITU-R P. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 187 . You can also enter the length of each waveguide. you can select the following climatic zones: • The Geoclimatic tab: - Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as the quality calculation method. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. For more information on the geoclimatic file. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected in the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. You can also add a Shielding Factor.530-12: Under ITU-R P.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0. The different geoclimatic parameters are described below: Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density.1510-0. you can choose between Warm and Humid. or on both transmission and reception. Rec. Rec. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. in other words. Current Methods: Under Current Methods. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.99% of the average year). To access all geoclimatic parameters whatever the methods you have selected. click the Display All button available under Current Methods. waveguides compatible with the selected antenna and equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Waveguide Compatibility and Antenna/Equipment Compatibility tables.01% of the average year (or.01% of the average year based on Rec. you can define additional losses to be taken into account on transmission. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. ITU-R P.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded). Under Connection Losses. For more information on the geoclimatic file. For more information on the geoclimatic file.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P. ITU-R P. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates.836-3. ITU-R P. you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. For more information.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. ITU-R P. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management in the list. or based on Rec.835-3 (and select a season).835-3 (and select a season). reception. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file.530: The parameters found under Rec. Atoll displays the attenuation. For more information on the geoclimatic file.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Rainfall exceeded 0. ITU-R P.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file.

453-9. you can define K. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you define whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. . Under Refractivity. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. If you select the Simplified Method option. the k factor median value. you can select the Terrain Type.530-5. using a userdefined reference altitude. described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. For more information on the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. Each link class can have different performance objectives. you can choose between "Flat Terrain". "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". Method: Under K. through the microwave link’s Properties 188 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .530-5. you can choose between "Open Areas" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. The Display tab. ITU-R P. If no propagation model is selected. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. If you are using ITU-R P. For more information on the geoclimatic file. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.Q. Refractivity: Under Refractivity. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. You can access the properties of a microwave link. you can select the link class. Under Geoclimatic Factor. ITU-R P. you assign the performance objectives to the link.Atoll User Manual Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. • Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. • 7. 530-5 or Rec. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water and "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. ITU-R P. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km.3. you can define the appearance of the microwave link and its extremities. ITU-R P.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec. you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2.Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal. K. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P. If you select the Terrain-based Method option. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. calculated using the set parameters. - - • The Reliability tab: Link Class: Under Link Class. the propagation condition factor for Vigants-Barnett method. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. -8.Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. Method. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. for the K. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154.530: Under ITU-R P. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. you can define propagation-related parameters: . you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference.Q. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. -8: Under ITU-R P. Atoll displays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. Atolldisplays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone. The Propagation tab. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class.530-5. ITU-R P. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. For information on creating a link class. -8 and Vigants-Barnett.530-5. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec.530. If you select the User-defined option under Multipath Occurence. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. Vigants-Barnett: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link You can modify an existing microwave link or you can create a new microwave link.839-3 (and select a season).Q method. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. you can define the K factor.530-5 or 530-8 methods.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). is displayed.Q.. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. you can enter the C factor value. you can define the PL factor.

The context menu appears. Click the Port Parameter Settings button. Transmission Attenuation: The transmission attenuation in dB. 3. After defining the configuration for one direction. The number must be from 1 to 10.3 Defining Port Parameters In Atoll. Right-click the Links folder. you can define either a frequency or the channels used. The context menu appears. The number must be from 1 to 10. port settings is not mandatory. 4. Click Apply. two channels with diversity status are required. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. If you are creating a new microwave link: a. Additional parameters appear. 4. The context menu appears. Define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in one direction: Channel: The channel number. Select Ports > Open table. The Links New Element Properties dialogue appears. or frequency diversity. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Properties from the context menu. They have to be defined if you use dual polarized antennas. Select the Radio tab. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). Click OK. In case of frequency diversity. 2. 10. To create or modify a microwave link: 1. For other configurations. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 6. Click the Expand button ( c. The Properties dialogue appears. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. Polarisation: The signal polarisation. You can configure port parameters for an individual microwave link or for all microwave links. 9. To define port parameters for a single microwave link: 1. Under Frequencies. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The table opens. 3.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management dialogue. Right-click the microwave link whose port parameters you want to define. Tx port: The port number for the transmitting equipment. Right-click the Links folder. Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The context menu appears. 7. e. d. Define the following parameters: Link: the name of the microwave link. Defined the Half-band used on SiteA. 5.3. 7. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Right-click the microwave link you want to modify. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The microwave link’s Properties dialogue appears. 11. Modify the parameters described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. 13. To define port parameters for all microwave links: 1. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. The Ports Definition dialogue closes. Click the Expand button ( 3. 8. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m. b. Select New from the context menu. you can define the opposite direction by clicking the Initialise Symmetrically button. ) to expand the Links folder. ports are used to configure channel(s) in detail. Click OK. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. d. ) to expand the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new microwave link or modifying an existing microwave link. b. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 189 . Reception Attenuation: The reception attenuation in dB. 12. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. Rx port: The port number for the receiving equipment. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. select a Sub-Band for the SiteA of the microwave link. c. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m").

7. To create a microwave link on two existing sites using a link template: 1.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template With Atoll. The number must be from 1 to 10. Move the pointer to the site that you would like to use as the other extremity of the microwave link and click it. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters. In the map window. In case of frequency diversity. ). Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). Click OK. Select Using The Mouse On The Map from the menu. You can create a microwave link in the following ways: • • Directly on the map between new or existing sites using a link template. you can create new microwave links based on link templates. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. two channels with diversity status are required. The pointer now changes ( ). ). If you are placing a new microwave link on two existing sites: a. Site A: the name of the site defining one extremity of the link.5 Managing Microwave Link Templates Atoll comes with microwave link templates. Transmission Attenuation: the transmission attenuation in dB. Figure 7.112: The Microwave toolbar In this section. b. Site B: the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). In the Link Creation dialogue. 5. 4.112). Click once on the map to indicate the location of the first end of the link. where SiteX is the name of the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created). transmitters. The site is now one extremity of the microwave link. 4.3. 3. define the following parameters: Model: the link template you want to use in order to create the microwave link. the following are explained: • • "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 "Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 190 . Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment. but you can also create and modify microwave link templates. and passive repeaters. Click again on the map to indicate the location of the other end of the link. 2. The pointer changes ( The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you clicked on the map.Atoll User Manual Way: the link direction (AB or BA). Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment.3. Channel: the channel number. On two existing sites using a link template. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. In the Microwave toolbar. Select Between Sites from the menu. 7. The Link Creation dialogue appears. The tools for working with microwave link templates can be found on the Microwave toolbar (see Figure 7. If you are placing a new microwave link on two new sites: a. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. 2. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. In the Microwave toolbar. select a link template from the list. Reception Attenuation: the reception losses attenuation in dB. select a link template from the list. click the site that you would like to use as one extremity of the microwave link. The pointer now changes ( b. Atoll names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX – SiteY. The number must be from 1 to 10. The microwave link is now created between the two sites. By default. Polarisation: the signal polarisation. 3. To place a microwave link directly on the map using a link template: 1. 5.

4. As well. 5. 5. 7. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears.5. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. To create a link template based on an existing microwave link 1. 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 191 . The new link template will be available in the template menu. click the arrow to the right of the list. clicking them in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select one link or site.5. It is available in the list of the Microwave toolbar. Click the Delete button. 2. 2. In the Radio toolbar. In the Microwave toolbar. modify or delete a field in the link templates: 1. you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. Click OK. click the arrow to the right of the list. In the dialogue that appears. Under Available Templates. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from the map. The Properties dialogue appears. Select Manage Templates from the list. 2. To modify an existing link template: Under Available Templates. If there is more than one link between the same sites or if there are two sites in close proximity. in a complex radio-planning project. The new link template has the same parameters as the microwave link it is based on. Right-click the microwave link you want to use as template in the Map window. The Properties dialogue appears.3. The context menu appears. Click the Fields button. or the Delete button to delete a user-defined field. it can be difficult to find the data object on the Data tab. 3. select the link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create and click Add. by selecting the existing link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create. Note: If you add a field to the link templates. although it might be visible in the map window.3. Therefore. 2. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears.3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template To delete a link template: 1.1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template You can create a link template based on an existing microwave link. select the link template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. the Properties button to modify properties. To create a link template based on an existing link template or modify a link template: 1. For information on the fields available in the open window. or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. see "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191.3. You can also create a link template based on a link template selected in the Link Template Properties dialogue. The new link template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. you can modify the properties of any link template. click the arrow to the right of the list. you must add an equivalent field to the Sites table or the field will not be taken into account. The link template is deleted. You can now create a new link template or modify an existing one: To create a new link template: Under Available Templates.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management • "Deleting a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 7. Click OK. Click OK. Select Manage Templates from the list.3. click the Add button to add a field. 7.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map In Atoll.5. Select Save As A Template from the context menu. 7. 5. you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. 4. However.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template To add. 3. In the Radio toolbar. Select Manage Templates from the list. You can also change the position of the site by dragging it. select the template you want to delete.

You. Other (XPIC. To perform an audit of the microwave link network: 1. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. For information on defining the tooltips. doing engineering and interference studies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. Click OK to perform the audit. in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. the channels must belong to the selected frequency sub-band. a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. including from fields that you add. because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. undefined point-to-multipoints (i. but also to distinguish microwave links at a glance. The following tools can be used to display information about microwave links: • Label: You can display information about each object. point-to-multipoints with no link). the number of channels must not exceed the number of channels allowed by the equipment. Microwave link colour: You can set the microwave link colour to display information about the microwave link. you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish microwave links by frequency bands. it is not necessary. • • 7. you can restrict 192 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of some data.): Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that: XPIFvalue of the equipment is a non-zero value when XPIC system is used on a link. 7. such as each site or microwave link. Antenna Separation. 2. In such a situation. Atoll displays the results of the audit in the Events Viewer. For example. Frequency sub-band definition: The frequency band must be defined.8 Checking Data Consistency You can perform an audit of the microwave link network. too much information will lead to a cluttered display.3. so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible.e. however..e. Consequently.3.) - Undefined Records: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify if there are undefined multi-hops (i. or to distinguish inactive from active microwave links. etc. multi-hops with no link). The Microwave Data Check dialogue appears. You can choose to display more information than in the label. excluded channels must belong to the list of channels and at least one channel must be available. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table.3. define the parameters of the audit: Frequency Consistency: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify: Frequency band definition: The minimum frequency must be lower than the maximum frequency. waveguides and frequency sub-band must be the same as the link frequency band and. In the Microwave Data Check dialogue.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database. or unused repeaters. The label is always displayed. Antenna separation is a non-zero value when space diversity is used on a link. the frequency band of antennas.Atoll User Manual Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment": • • • • • • • "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18 "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links Atoll allows to you to display information about microwave links in a number of different ways. - - List All Verifications: Select this check box if you want to display all verifications performed in addition to detected inconsistencies. might be responsible for the planning for only one city. in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. 7. Tooltips: You can display information about each object. For example. you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For information on defining the microwave link colour.. and when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle. Link definition: at least one direction must be selected. For information on defining the label. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. such as each site or microwave link. equipment. 3. the frequency defined must be within the frequency band limits. including from fields that you add. the antenna vertical and horizontal patterns must be correctly aligned at the extremities (Antenna patterns are correctly aligned when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the pattern electrical tilt angle. Select Tools > Data Audit > Microwave Data Check from the context menu. Pattern attenuations are considered the same if they differ less than 1 dB. This enables you not only to display selected information.

For information on graphic filters. In this section.1. Along the profile. You can filter sites and microwave links according to one or more fields. "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201. "Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights" on page 200. or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. "Zooming In on the Profile" on page 194. limits the number of sites and microwave links to be calculated. "Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile" on page 195. equipment. For information on filtering. with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). "Studying Microwave Link Clearance" on page 194. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets.1 Displaying the Path Profile In this section. see "Filtering Data" on page 62. For information on computation zones.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile In Atoll. "Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values" on page 197 7. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. You can make a microwave link profile analysis using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. it is displayed in the profile tab by a vertical line in the profile.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. • Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied. To open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window: 1. this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a black vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction into account). It includes any passive repeaters composing the link. The context menu appears. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31.4 Analysing the Path Profile Microwave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in Atoll. 2. "Printing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 195. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. At the top of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. 7. For information on focus zones. there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied.4. In addition. if the signal meets an obstacle. its frequency band. interference). and the propagation model you want to use. see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 71. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. "Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options" on page 194. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. you can make a profile analysis of a microwave link. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Path Profile" on page 193. each with its own advantages: • Filtering the desired sites and microwave links You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver sites. Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu. you can select which part of the profile you want to display: • • • Site A ==> Site P Site P ==> Site B Site B ==> Site P © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 193 . In Atoll. This enables you to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study. When a repeater is inserted on the link.4. You can combine a computation zone and a filter. you must configure its antennas. which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. The main peak is the one that intersects the Fresnel ellipsoid the most. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the distance on the horizontal axis. The diffraction attenuation is displayed above the peak. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. ) in The Profile tab provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site A to site B or vice versa. 7. in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwave links to be studied. Before studying a microwave link. You can also open Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window using the Profile Analysis button ( the toolbar.

you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations and the manner in which the curvature of the Earth is displayed. either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unobstructed ones. The context menu appears. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. this feature is described in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section. it indicates the tilts/direct ray. 8. F’1 for the first k factor value and F’2 for the second one. To hide or display the Fresnel zones: 1. Atoll displays the clearance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k.1.4. 2. Note: When 100% of the Fresnel ellipsoid is displayed. In addition. On the Reflection tab. the clearance is referred to as F’. and reflection paths you want to display. Select Display Fresnel ellipsoids from the context menu. you can define whether the reflections should be displayed or not. 2. The context menu appears. it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically.Atoll User Manual • • • Site P ==> Site A Site A ==> Site B (profile "broken" at Site P) Site B ==> Site A (profile "broken" at Site P) When a second repeater (Q) is inserted on the link. Select Display Options from the context menu. the clearance is referred to as F. 3. the azimuths. 4. The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue. and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular. When the percentage of the Fresnel ellipsoid is different from 100%.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance The Profile tab allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. 3.1. a green coloured line is drawn from the transmitter to the first obstacle’s highest point. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options The Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool enables you to manage parameters that affect the display of the profile.4 Zooming In on the Profile Atoll enables you to zoom in on the profile. These values can be set through the advanced options available by clicking the button ( ) opposite the Link list. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids. 7. 4. you can define the percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellipsoids to be shown. If there are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses. you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. On the Ellipsoid and Antenna Beamwidth tab. 6.1. 7. 7. Select the microwave link to analyse. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle that introduces the highest loss in the link. 194 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . On the Display tab. F1 for the first k factor value and F2 for the second one. Select the microwave link to analyse. both first and second. Click OK. A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depict the minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. and the angles of incidence for both antennas. You can left-click the Link button in the Profile tab and choose from the context menu: • Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue.4. To open the microwave link profile display options window: 1. You can also display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver. you can hide or display the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link. the profile display options include Site Q as well. while the second related to the second k value is shown in red.4. and whether you want to display the antenna beamwidths for transmitter and receiver sites. You can view the microwave link profile with two different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor). 7. 5. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. Here. When displaying the clearance.

Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 6. Select the microwave link to analyse.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile You can display the clearance values of a microwave link using either the Profile tab or the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool. 3. 5. Click OK to print. 2. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. the following are described: • • "Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 195 "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196 7. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. 7. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. To print the content of the Profile tab: 1. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. Select Zoom In from the context menu. 2. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To zoom in on the Profile: 1. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. The window displays the following information for each selected point along the profile: Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. Select Print from the context menu. 4. Select the microwave link to analyse. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. In this section. 5. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. When you release the mouse button. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 195 .5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile You can print a microwave link profile. 2. Drag to the opposite corner. 3.113). To restore the initial profile: 1.4. Distance up to Optical Path: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. (see Figure 7. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 4. A separate window opens displaying details of the selected point. 4. 3. 3. Select the microwave link to analyse. Move the pointer along the profile. The context menu appears. 4. 7. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer.6. Select the microwave link to analyse. To display the details on a point of a microwave link profile: 1.4. The context menu appears. Atoll zooms in on the selected area.4.1. 2. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu.1. 5.1. The context menu appears. Select Display the current point information from the context menu. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.1 Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile.

Fresnel Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. This value is relative to the bottom of the Fresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value.2 Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to view all the profile analysis data for each selected point along the microwave link profile.1. Distance: The distance from the transmitting site.113: Microwave Link Analysis window – Profile tab As as you drag the pointer along the profile in the Microwave Link Analysis window. the pointer changes ( ) to indicate the location of the current point along the profile in the map window. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (percentage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). the following information appears in a tool tip: Coordinates: The cursor coordinates given in the display coordinate system. 2. Clearance: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Select Engineering > Values from the context menu. To display the profile data using the Values tab: 1. The context menu appears. Clutter Height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file. You can also access the Values tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Values tab. The Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window displays the following values for each point along the profile: Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site.4. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. Clutter: the clutter class.6. Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile. Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model. Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files). Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer 7. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. When you place the pointer on this special cursor. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. 196 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

3. You can edit the following columns: Altitude: The altitude (DTM) Clutter: The clutter class Clutter Height: The clutter height Category: The clutter category.115).114: Penetration and clearance values on the Values tab 7. where X is the highest resolution of clutter class and DTM maps.7. To edit profile values using the mouse: 1.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7.4. Click the Edit button. You can modify some profile values at any point along the profile and immediately check the impact of these modifications in the Profile tab.1. 2. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 3. the clutter height and the clutter category) can be edited in the table or using the mouse. The resolution of the information given depends on the resolution of the geographic data: information is given every X metres. To edit the profile values in the table: 1. the clutter class. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Figure 7. 2. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Editing Profile Values" on page 197 "Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones" on page 198 "Copying and Pasting Profile Values" on page 199 "Exporting Profile Values" on page 199 "Importing Profile Values" on page 199 "Saving the Edited Profile Values" on page 199 "Refreshing the Profile Values" on page 199 7. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field. the altitude. In this section.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values The geographic details provided on the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool are stored in a table.1 Editing Profile Values Some values (e.g. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 197 . Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished updating the table.115: The Values tab when editing. Right-click the profile view..1.4.

ii. Drag the point to its new altitude. 198 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The pointer changes ( ). Figure 7.Atoll User Manual 4. Clutter: Select Clutter if you want to edit clutter classes (see Figure 7. Drag the point to its new clutter height. Figure 7. You can see lines separating the clutter categories. Click the line.116). i. Clutter Height: Select Clutter Height if you want to edit clutter heights (see Figure 7.117: Clutter heights in edit mode. Drag the line to change the area with the corresponding clutter category. i. In the profile. i.119: Clutter categories in edit mode. Figure 7. The clutter classes are displayed with lines separating the clutter classes if clutter heights are defined or with points if clutter heights are not defined. you can view reflection areas and vegetation zones.119). Select one of the following columns in the table: Altitude: Select Altitude if you want to edit ground altitudes (see Figure 7. Drag to the opposite corner and release the mouse button. The pointer changes ( ).2 Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones When you are editing the profile as explained in "Editing Profile Values" on page 197. 7. Select Zoom In from the context menu. The pointer changes ( ). Click the point you want to edit. Drag the line or point to change the area with the corresponding clutter class. 6. Figure 7.7.117). Click the line or point.4. Category: Select Category if you want to edit clutter categories (see Figure 7.116: Ground in edit mode.118). ii.118: Clutter classes in edit mode. Click the point you want to edit. i.1. ii. 5. The pointer changes ( ). click one of the four corners of the area you want to select. ii. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. 7.

Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.7. Click the Edit button. Define export settings as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.4. Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage to view vegetation zones without foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.115). Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.4. The Import dialogue appears.1. Click the Edit button.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To display reflection areas and vegetation zones: 1.1. If you want. To save the edited profile values: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 199 .4.115). 3. clutter classes. The Export dialogue appears. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the clipboard into the selected cells. clutter heights.1. Click the Edit button. To import data into the table: 1. Zones with foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ). 7. To copy and paste profile values in the table: 1. Vegetation zones without foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ).7. Click the Actions button and select Commit Values to Link. you can save them in the link properties.6 Saving the Edited Profile Values When you edit the data in the profile table. click the Actions button and select Paste.1. - - 7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. clutter heights.3 Copying and Pasting Profile Values You can copy and paste some profile values such as altitude. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.7.115). Click the cell with the data you want to copy and drag to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Click the Actions button and select Import. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Click the Actions button and select Export. altitude. To export profile values: 1. You must already have selected Display Reflection Areas if you want to Display Slopes. Reflection areas are displayed with a pattern ( ). To restore the original link profile values: 1.e. 2. press CTRL+U. 4. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 2. 3. Hide Zones: Select Hide Zones to hide reflection areas and vegetation zones.5 Exporting Profile Values You can export the entire table or selected columns to ASCII text files (in TXT or CSV formats) and MS Excel files.115). The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Display Slopes: Select Display Slopes to view the slope of the selected reflection area.115). 2. 7. To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells.115). 2. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.4. Right-click the profile view and select one of the following options from the context menu: Display Reflection Areas: Select Display Reflection Areas to view reflection areas taken into account in the reflection analysis and reflecting paths. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.7 Refreshing the Profile Values You can restore the original link profile values from the geographic data diles and replace the edited values. 2. and clutter categories) can be imported. the changes are not automatically saved and will be lost if you select another link or if you close the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.4. 7. clutter classes..7. 3.4 Importing Profile Values You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of the Values tab. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 3. Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage to view zones with foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses.1. 2. press CTRL+D. Click the Edit button. and clutter categories in the table. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Click the Edit button.7. 4. 7. To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells. Only editable values (i. Click the Edit button. 4. 3. Define import settings as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50.

you can modify or optimise microwave links antenna heights. Click the antenna height pointer ( height. Atoll allows you to calculate and adjust the microwave link antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values. 2. 3. The context menu appears. When defined.2. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link.Atoll User Manual 3. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Select the optimisation method: Clearance Condition Method: The Clearance Condition Method is based on the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Click the button beside the microwave links list ( 3. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. 2. 7.4. The context menu appears. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. you can modify antenna heights using the mouse or enter new values and see the clearance and penetration parameters displayed. 7. The context menu appears. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ) and enter the exact antenna height. To modify the antenna height: 1.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse You can use the mouse to modify the antenna height of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Select Save Hx and Tilt. In Atoll. from the context menu. from the context menu. 7.4. Select Optimisation Method from the context menu.4. To modify antenna heights using the mouse: 1. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna: 1. Using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. the following are explained: • • • "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200. In this section. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. 4. you should define the antenna height to avoid any obstruction of the line-ofsight signal and reflections.4. Atoll will determine antenna heights in order to fulfil the highest constraint.2 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights You can enter a new height for the antenna of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. ). This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site.2.2. 2. ) (the pointer changes ) and drag it up or down to modify the antenna 3.3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights Atoll enables you to automatically calculate antenna heights in order to avoid reflections and profile obstructions. 200 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 4. 4. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). Click the Actions button and select Refresh Geo Data. When defined. The Height Optimisation dialogue appears.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights When designing a microwave link network. Select Save Hx and Tilt. You can enter one or two values of the k factor and define for each of them a target clearance. 7. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ).

. The second type is a plane reflector type passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal. Dx and Dy. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). You can also use the context menu to lock the antenna height. The following sections explain how Atoll models passive repeaters. There are two main types of passive repeaters. In Atoll.1 Description of a Passive Repeater The parameters of a passive repeater can be found in the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. Minimum Diffraction Loss Method: Atoll determines antenna heights to minimise diffraction losses due to the main obstacle (i. 7. .3 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater Passive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. 7. This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles. Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites: • • • • • No power is required No regular road access is required No equipment housing is needed They are environmentally friendly Little or no maintenance is required. Only the height of the other antenna (assuming it is not loced as well) will be calculated to optimise the link. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 201 ." In this section. It enables you to calculate optimum antenna heights for two-site microwave link profiles (e.The context 8. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab). 5. Right-click the the antenna height pointer ( menu appears. The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connected by a short feeder cable. "Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 202.4.g. these are often called passive reflectors or plane reflectors.3.e. Furthermore. these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters. 6. Choose Optimise to calculate the optimum antenna heights for both extremities. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. This enables you to prevent the antenna height from being modified during the optimisation process. Select the Take into account the reflection areas check box and define the range of k factor values (kmin and kmax) to be used during the antenna height optimisation if you want to take reflection into consideration. you can estimate the growth of vegetation (Projected tree or foliage growth). X and Y. it is not accessible for microwave link profiles involving one or more repeaters. respectively. distortions and rain etc. these height limits are represented on the Profile tab. Atoll can model both types of passive repeaters and provide you with access to all the relevant parameters. if you wish. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading. each traversing different type terrain. the following are explained: • • • "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201.e. you can always restore the last antenna height value by selecting Restore from the same menu. Antenna Position: You can modify the Antenna Position. Atoll takes this value into account for clutter categories from 6 to 14 and adds it to the clutter height. ..4. "Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater" on page 202. 10. Passive repeaters divide the radio path into two branches. it calculates antenna heights to get a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone).Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management If you have out-of-date clutter class maps. If defined.. Due to this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders". The context menu appears.Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location. Hb and Tilts from the context menu to save the current antenna heights and tilts in the microwave link. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab Name: The passive repeater name. a "repeater" is always a "passive repeater. Click OK. normally having different lengths and different inclinations. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Site: The site where the repeater is located (from the Sites table). Site Site B or Repeater P Site B). 9. These advantages mean that passive repeaters can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas. i. respectively. ) for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise. 7. Select Save Ha.Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position.

through the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. or modifying several existing passive repeaters. By default. Tip: If you are creating several passive repeaters at the same time. You can click the Calculate button ( - For a back-to-back antenna type repeater. The Passive Repeaters New Element Properties dialogue appears. define these parameters: Surface: The surface area for the repeater. you can choose the waveguide and define the length. To create or modify a passive repeater: 1. define the following parameters: Under Antenna1. 7. In this case. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Under Waveguide. d. The context menu appears. b. you can choose the antenna.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site. You can click the Calculate button ( ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. The Passive Repeaters table appears. e. For information on copying and pasting data. c. you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Passive Repeaters table.3. For a reflector type repeater. The context menu appears. Modify the parameters described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisation. Right-click the Links folder. you can create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of transmission. 3. You can access the properties of a passive repeater. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 7. Tilt: The tilt angle towards the site of transmission. see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47. Select Passive Repeaters > New from the context menu. you can choose the antenna. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the repeater. described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. you can add it to an existing site. d.4. define the antenna height. or have Atoll automatically create a new site. the appear- ance of the button changes ( ). Right-click the passive repeater in the Passive Repeaters table. Right-click the Links folder. 4. When the filter is active. ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. Atoll proposes in the list waveguides compatible with the selected antennas as defined in the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater You can modify an existing passive repeater or you can create a new passive repeater. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new passive repeater or modifying an existing passive repeater. Click OK. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of reception. f. The context menu appears. c. • The Type tab Type: Define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type repeater.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll.3. 202 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Azimuth: The azimuth towards the site of transmission. You can open the Passive Repeaters table by rightclicking the Links folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. The passive repeater’s Properties dialogue appears. Height: The reflector height. ) next You can access the Properties of the selected site and frequency band by clicking the Browse button ( to the corresponding item. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. If you want. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the model field. When you create a passive microwave repeater. Under Antenna2. Select Record Properties from the context menu. b.4. If you are creating a new passive repeater: a. define the antenna height. Select Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu.

A microwave link reliability analysis determines whether a designed system will operate successfully. Select the microwave link.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Atoll permits a maximum of 2 passive repeaters in a single microwave link. Site Q Site P. Site A Site P. The following terms are used in Atoll for passive repeaters and related parameters: • • Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151. Atoll automatically creates a new repeater in the Passive Repeaters table and a new site in the Sites table that is assigned to the newly created repeater. to a group of microwave links. 2. A part of the link is called a "Section. or to a single microwave link.5. Site P Site Q. transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the microwave link path. or directly on the map. This allows you to predict the received signal level and to calculate the thermal fade margin. Site B Site Q. 4. Click the arrow next to New Repeater button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. For information on defining the properties of the new microwave passive repeater. To create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. Site P Site A. you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. In practice. Reliability analysis takes into consideration the parameters of fade margin. see "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 203 . Site A Site B and Site B Site A Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections. Select Panel Reflector or Back-to-back Antennas from the menu according to the type of passive repeater you want to create. to a group of microwave links. For example: Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section. Click the map to place the repeater. One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any). define the microwave link class and related performance objectives and set the calculation parameters. this performance level is never achieved over any microwave link due the continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment. "Analysing Microwave Links" on page 206. You can assign a propagation model to all microwave links at once. or to a single microwave link. a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time." A section can be: One of the directions of a bi-directional link. Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types and give target performance objectives to microwave links.5 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability Reliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessing its performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency band assigned to the microwave link and azimuth(s) for the repeater antenna(s) are calculated according to the directions of the two sections of the microwave link. You can select it from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Note: You can also insert a repeater in a microwave link by selecting Insert Repeater from the microwave link’s context menu and then clicking on the microwave link where you want to insert the repeater. 3. Setting link parameters is explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159.1 Analysing a Single Microwave Link When you create a microwave link. The repeater is placed on the map. diffraction loss. Ideally. radio parameters. Calculation parameters include global parameters applied to all microwave links and link parameters such as geoclimatic and reliability parameters defined per link. 7. Before analysing the microwave link reliability. you must assign a propagation model. terrain roughness calculations. In this section. 7. the following are explained: • • • "Analysing a Single Microwave Link" on page 203. You can assign a link class to all microwave links at once. antenna parameters. Defining global parameters is explained in "Global Parameters" on page 156. Assigning a link class is explained in "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154. represented by the site symbol ( ). The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annual basis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 208. Site Q Site B. Site A Site B Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections. average annual temperature.

• • 204 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the results provided in this report are calculated in real-time. locations. Therefore. tilts. data rates. quality objectives (SESR. You can also open the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Report tab. Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive fading.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins Atoll allows you to determine the margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined in the link class. Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. margin against enhancements. diameters and near fields. minimal channel bandwidths. altitude and coordinate system). the thermal fade margin. gains. capacity. any modifications made to the profile of the microwave link using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window or any modifications in the geography of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are taken into account in the link budget on the Report tab. or the calculation parameters. • • • • • 7. the following are explained: • • • • • "Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins" on page 204 "Calculating a Microwave Link Budget" on page 204. ESR. azimuths. Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters.5. heights. i. antennas used at both sites with their respective models. ESR. their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total required margin. 2. ATPC effects. rate. To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link: 1. This will open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window with the EPO tab displayed by default. Microwave link required margin results on the EPO tab include the following information: • Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name. it is possible to modify the properties of the microwave link. The Report tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window contains the link budget for the link being studied. "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity. modulation used. capacities and configurations. a basic budget including the operating frequency band. Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calculations. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each studied microwave link as detailed below. you can read whether quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. azimuths. 2.1. Requirements: the required output power you can compare to the current output power displayed in brackets.Atoll User Manual In this section. Microwave link budget results on the Report tab include the following information: • Summary: Under Summary. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antenna details such as the models. Moreover. modulation used. the link length. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. whether discrimination reduction and enhancements are taken into account). This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section. heights. tilts. The context menu appears. and altitudes for both extremities. the equipment installed at each site (name. margin against discrimination reduction. how much you have to decrease or increase the maximum power and the required antenna diameter. site names. the operating frequency band of the microwave link. repeaters (if any). gains and diameters. BBER) and availability objectives (SESR..1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. a global estimation of the cut off duration over an average year taking into account both link quality and availability. "Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report" on page 206 7. location. "Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters" on page 205. and immediately display the impact of the modifications in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window (both Profile and Report tabs). its length and calculation parameters (propagation model. digital hierarchy employed. Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu.5. transmitter powers. Select Engineering > Report from the context menu. passive repeater gains (if any). minimal channel bandwidth and the configuration).e. Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. models for availability and quality calculations. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. To calculate the microwave link required margins: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. the worst month quality (in % of time) and the average annual availability (in % of time). compatible digital hierarchy.2 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget Atoll provides you with a detailed microwave link budget tool. The microwave link required margins are listed on the EPO tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. a snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window in order to facilitate direct visualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report and an extract of the map window showing the studied link and the surrounding area. The context menu appears. calculated and required thermal fade margins and calculated and required composite fade margins) and the required total margin. BBER). total losses comprising filter losses. This tab contains the report generated after the calculation of required margins. Furthermore.

overflow thresholds. ESR. 4. PL percentage. 2. outage probability due to faults for the average year and the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. The Hop Analysis Parameters dialogue appears. BER values. polarisation at both sites.. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. port connection losses. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). These results include availability of hot standby. When you have finished modifying analysis parameters. click the Actions button. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both direction. rain intensity (exceeding 0. water vapour density. These results include the outage probability. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is taken into consideration in total attenuation). interference. BBER (required)). the outage probability. To modify analysis parameters for a link: 1. and waveguides and cable losses.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by changing some calculation options. These results include the outage probability. temperature. 3. earth curvature factor (k). antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. You can set the following options: Take Space Diversity Into Account: If you want to take space diversity into account. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising filter losses. shielding losses. fading due to discrimination reduction). To modify calculation parameters for analysis: 1. the port circulator and attenuator losses. The context menu appears. or change calculation models. thermal noise.01% of time). losses due to water vapour. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Inverse Polarisation: Select the Inverse Polarisation check box if you want to take inverse polarisation into account. port connection losses. 7. rain attenuation. OK: Click OK without clicking Save in the Link to check the impact of the selected options on the report without modifying the microwave link properties.1. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. Take Frequency Diversity Into Account: If you want to take frequency diversity into account. and waveguides and cable losses. • • • • • • • • This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. the polarisation. shared losses. You can define the studied port. ESR. 2. availability model. climatic factor. connection losses. The Microwave Radio Link Properties dialogue appears. click the Actions button. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. free space loss. space diversity and frequency diversity). and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). The context menu appears. Propagation: the nominal received signal level. the corresponding frequency. if it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. Gain difference between antennas: Define the difference of gain between both antennas.5. diffraction losses. Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. Click OK to check the impact of the selected options on the report. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. fading due to discrimination reduction. enhancement forecast). Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. BBER). select the Take Space Diversity into Account check box and define the following: Distance between antennas: Define the distance between main and diversity antennas. and availability objectives (SESR. losses due to dry air. etc. For further information. ESR (required). ESR (required). quality objectives (SESR. click one of the following: Save in the Link: Click Save in the Link to save these changes in the microwave link properties and click OK to close the dialogue. details for the average year (rain fading. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. Select Analysis Parameters for the Hop.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management connection losses. shielding losses. shared losses. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. BBER). the channel. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 205 . Select Calculation Parameters. BBER (required)). Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. the transmission and reception port numbers. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. quality model. select the Take Frequency Diversity into Account check box and define the number of separation channels. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. selective fading. 3. the outage probability.

g. 7. select its check box. c. b. Choose how to align the paragraph. clear its check box. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected.1 Setting a Microwave Link as Active Once microwave links are set up within a network. To restore the initial style. Atoll carries out the calculation for all microwave links in the subfolder that are active.2. you can decide whether or not to activate them. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. a. you can create a computation zone... the following are explained: • • • • "Setting a Microwave Link as Active" on page 206 "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207 "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207 "Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity" on page 208 7. select the Reset button.5. When working with a large network. Click the Style tab. c. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links in the subfolder that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. In other words.Atoll User Manual 7. you can print them or export them. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. click the Actions button in the window to open its context menu. Select Export in order to export the link budget report in RTF format. The results are displayed in the form of a report. a. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. that are selected by the current filter parameters). Before calculating one or more link budgets. availability and interference analyses and associated reports and statistics only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered 206 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. If there is no computation zone defined.5. select the AaBbYyZz button.1. Select Print in order to print the link budget report. select the Reset button. a. The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. For information on the computation zone. d. Microwave links in Atoll can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters (e.5. and intersect the computation zone. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). by frequency band). 3.1. In this section. You can launch simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave links grouped in a subfolder. Click the Contents tab. Centred and Align Right. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. The Report Configuration dialogue appears. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. b. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. To configure the report display: 1. b.5. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab).2 Analysing Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave links simultaneously. d. if you have drawn a computation zone. To display a result. Click one style. To change the font.e. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Quality. Click OK.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report After you have configured the reports displayed in the Report and EPO tabs. click the Actions button and select Configure Report. 2. To print or export the report: 1. filtered (i. When you create a computation zone. You can choose beween Align Left. 7. 4. To hide a result.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report and EPO tabs to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report.

) to expand the Links folder. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder and rightclick the group of microwave links you want to set as active. Select Activate Links from the context menu. In the Field Selection dialogue. Right-click the microwave link you want to activate. you can set the propagation model and other calculation parameters. Define the content of the report: a. The Field Selection dialogue appears. To set a group of microwave links as active. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. 3. 4. The Properties dialogue appears. select the fields that you want to display in the report. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management microwave links). To define the content of the link budget report: 1. For each microwave link that you want to set as active. 2. 3. To select a field to be included in the report.5. Click the Expand button ( 3. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select the microwave links you want to set as active: To set all microwave links as active.2. The context menu appears.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets You can calculate a link budget for all microwave links or for a group of microwave links. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links table: 1. 7. The context menu appears. Click Add. c. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Links folder. 4. Select Active Link from the context menu. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. Once you have ensured that all microwave links are active. The context menu appears. right-click the Links folder. 7. 2. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model and calculation parameters. Select Link Budgets > Properties from the context menu. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. you can define the content of the link budget report. The next time you configure a report. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 207 . 5. 2. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. 4. 5. active microwave links are displayed in red ( links are displayed in grey ( ). To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links context menu: 1. ) in the Links folder. To set an individual microwave link as active: 1.5. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. The Links table appears with each microwave link’s parameters in a second row. see "Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll". Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.2. In the Explorer window. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. select the check box in the Activate column. Select Open Table. inactive You can set an individual microwave link as active from its context menu or you can set more than one microwave link as active by activating them from the Links context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The transmitter is now active. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. 3. To change the order of the fields. The selected microwave links are set as active.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report Before calculating the link budget. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. 2. b. from top to bottom. Click OK to validate the selection of fields to be displayed in the report.

antennas and equipment installed). The context menu appears. Notes • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. the fade margin.3. unavailability due to rain. All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave link being studied. If geographic data maps have been updated. you can quickly perform a link budget for a group of links. A microwave link can be common to more than one multihop as well. the following are explained: • • "Creating Multi-hops" on page 208 "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 210 7. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. reception parameters (sensitivity. etc. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. If microwave link properties have been modified. once calculations have been performed for all the links. So. a multi-hop is managed as a group of microwave links. 3. Atoll removes existing calculations. to construct a microwave connection over areas that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances.3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis AtollMulti-hop microwave links. if you added a new clutter class map).5. In general practice. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP. To recalculate the link budget for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder.. intermediate results such as propagation. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double clicking the corresponding record in the report. To force Atoll to recalculate the link budget: 1. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. and recalculates the link budget. microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes. 2. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. Select Link Budgets > Force Calculations from the context menu.5.e. the following are explained: • • • • • "Creating a Multi-hop" on page 209.5. "Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally" on page 210. various losses. unavailability due to faults).4 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity Link budget calculations performed for a group of microwave links (i. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets. "Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 209. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. The context menu appears.).1 Creating Multi-hops In Atoll. you must force Atoll to recalculate. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder.). and geo-climatic parameters.g. 7. Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analysis over multi-hops.Atoll User Manual To perform link budget calculations on a group of microwave links: 1. To recalculate the link budget for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. the signal level received. 7. outage probabilities) are saved in the Atoll document. 208 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll automatically detects invalidity of the calculation when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse" on page 209. It also details the propagation calculation (total attenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air). The context menu appears. etc. Atoll displays the link budget report. In the last case (e. Select Link Budgets > Calculate from the context menu. b. In this section.2.. 3. various losses. In this section. are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a destination. 2. For the first two reasons. calculation options. Right-click the Links folder. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active" on page 210. Atoll indicates the characteristics of the link (sites. and its quality and availability. including valid ones. or multi-hops.

Atoll uses this information with the multi-hop length to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop. Select the Links tab. Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. b. Atoll names the newly created multi-hop link in the following manner: "Multi-hopsX".2 Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse To add a microwave link to a multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. 7. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. 2. where "X" increments with each instance of a multi-hop link. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. Or a. Select a link from the Link column.1 Creating a Multi-hop To create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder: 1. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link: Either a. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop. ).3. d. In the map. 3. The next microwave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the site parities). Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click on the map in each place you want to end a link and start a new link. Click the Expand button ( opens. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Properties dialogue appears. 2. you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the Browse button ( Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop. but can be modified. Select Add a Link from the context menu. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 10. Right-click on the multi-hop link.5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. b. Atoll creates an empty multi-hop link in the Multi-hops folder.3 Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse To create a new multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. Once you have selected a multi-hops class. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically.5. Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link. click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. Click OK. 8. The pointer changes ( ). By default. 7. Assign links to the multi-hop: a. The Multi-hops folder opens. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 209 . 3. 4.1. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link. The Multi-hops folder opens. The context menu appears. 11.3. Select New… from the context menu. 5. 4. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. The Microwave Radio Links folder ) to expand the Multi-hops folder.5. The pointer shape changes to 3. click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link. 9.1. 2. The context menu appears. Click OK. The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. Click the Multi-hop button ( ) on the toolbar. On the map. - 6. Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. in the map window. Note: The Other Properties tab will appear if you have defined additional fields in the Multihops table.1.3. The context menu appears. c. b. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears. 7.

Select Mapping Between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu. 7.6 Studying Reflection Studying reflection is essential to designing any microwave link network.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. Right-click the multi-hop link whose activity status you want to set. Atollcalculates the reflection point using 2-Ray model. add. Quality and availability analyses only take into account active microwave links and not inactive or filtered microwave links). 2. you can display reflection areas along the link profile and analyse the location of the reflection point and its impact on the received signal level. total length of the multi-hop link. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. transmitters. The context menu appears. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a multi-hop: 1. Summary: Atoll indicates if quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link. A reflected signal that can reach the receiver with enough strength and with a certain delay as compared to the direct signal can generate interference. ESR. and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link. The End-to-End Analysis dialogue appears.1.5 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a multi-hop link. availability (percentage over average year) and failures (percentage over year).3. 5. quality (percentage over a month). 4. This calculation is based on the ITU-R 530-5/8/10 recommendations. Right-click the multi-hop that you want to analyse.Atoll User Manual The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 2. BBER) compared to the required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faults and annual outage period. such as optic fibre links.5. Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you click. Expand the Multi-Hops folder by clicking the button 3.4 Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally Atoll allows you to map multiple microwave links to the multi-hop links . Do one of the following: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link active. margins. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.3. To map multiple links to multi-hop links: 1. and polarisation of each transmitting site. If no site exists. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). 2. The Multi-Hop Links table appears. ) to expand the Multi-Hops folder.3. Right-click the Multi-Hops folder.5. 4. Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band. Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link inactive. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. are also supported in the calculation. Click the Expand button ( 3. In Atoll. 3. delete. Select Analysis from the context menu. channels. It contains the following information: Multi-hop link characteristics: the microwave links forming the multi-hop link. In the Explorer window. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. sub-band. The context menu appears. 210 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outage ratio. In this table. you can modify. The context menu appears. Note: Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies. To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link: 1. quality indicators (probabilities of SESR. and passive repeaters. 4. 7. monthly and annual outage periods.5. Reception characteristics: reception thresholds. 7. The interference can generate a fading (called reflective fading) that can lower down the received signal. 7. containing all the multi-hop links and their corresponding microwave links.1.

Display all the paths: Select the Display all the paths check box if you want to display all possible reflected signals within the reflection area. 2. 4. Under For the selected area. Obstructed reflected signals are represented with orange dashed lines. The reflection does not create destructive interference. Right-click the Profile tab. Red: The reflection point is within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Then.e. see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151 Reflection point can have different locations as the k factor vary during the day. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. "Solutions Against Reflections" on page 215. In the Profile Display Options dialogue. Display the obstructed reflections: Select the Display the obstructed reflections check box if you want to display obstructed reflected signals. Green: Either there is no reflection point. the reflected signal is not obstructed). The context menu appears. Therefore. To display additional information: 1. Atollcolours the pattern and highlights the corresponding unobstructed reflected path if there is one. select the Display tide levels check box in order to display the height variation due to tides above the sea water clutter category. "Analysing Reflections" on page 212. or the reflection point is out of the reflection area. The reflection does not create destructive interference. select the Reflection tab.1 Displaying Reflection Atoll displays reflection areas along the profile and provides information about the interference generated by the reflected signal. it is not obstructed). if there is a reflection point within the reflection area. The option is automatically selected after you have displayed reflections as explained in the paragraph above. Click one reflection area. 3.6. For information on defining the range of k factor values. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. it is not based on the defined clutter categories. Under For All Reflection Zones. Right-click the Profile tab. Display the reflection plan: Select the Display the reflection plan check box in order to display the reflection slope. For information on defining the range of k factor values.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes in the microwave propagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile.e. The context menu appears. you have to check if this zone is a reflection area and in this case. 5. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. You can display additional information regarding reflected paths. the reflection analysis has to be performed for different k factor values. Orange: The reflection point is within the reflection area but the reflected signal is obstructed. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 211 . - 6. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. For information on defining the height variation. 7. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 2. The reflection can create destructive interference. In this section. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. The colour indicates if the reflection can generate destructive interference. 4. Select Display Options from the context menu. Interference can be destructive when the reflection point is located within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. you can select the following options: Display the specular reflection point: Select the Display the specular reflection point check box if you want to display reflection areas along the link profile and unobstructed reflected paths. This one is used to determine the reflection point. Under Display tide levels. The reflection zone is determined from antenna heights and ground altitude at the transmitter and receiver sites. - 7. Atolldisplays reflection areas and unobstructed reflected signals calculated for the first k factor value defined in the Profile tab. Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies: Select the Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies check box if you want to display the reflection zone regardless of clutter categories. To display reflection areas: 1. Reflection areas are represented with a hashed pattern and unobstructed reflected signals by orange lines. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. you can select the following options: Display the reflections for the k factor range: Select the Display the reflections for the k factor range check box if you want to display unobstructed and obstructed reflected paths calculated for the defined range of k factor values. 3. For information on assigning clutter categorries to clutter classes in the propagation model properties.

Temparature: The average temperature (in °C) of the zone in which the microwave link operates. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. Effective Coefficient Reflection: The reflection coefficient of the reflection area. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Frequency Band: The operating frequency band selected in the microwave link properties. tree covered and cryosphere clutter categories. "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. To display a detailed analysis of reflection areas: 1. Select the Report tab.2 Analysing Reflections In this section.Atoll User Manual Note: Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken microwave link profiles. If required. It depends on the roughness. fresh and sea water clutter categories. The context menu appears. Length: The microwave link length. Grazing angle of reflected ray: The grazing angle and the incidence angle of the reflected path on the reflection slope plane are complementary angles. or reflecting. it displays optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for the k factor defined in the Profile tab. Critical specular reflection point: This indicates if there is a reflection point for the selected reflection zone. 5. the length of the link and the transmitter antenna height above the reflection area. Link Specifications: You will find data on the studied microwave link: Longitude: The site position on the x-axis. Humidity Type: The humidity type depends on the clutter category. Select Display Reflections from the context menu.. Water Vapour Density: The water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. 7. 6. "Very dry" is considered for built-up area and dry ground clutter categories. Latitude: The site position on the y-axis. or intermediate. the profile should not include repeaters. "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214.6. Right-click the reflection area. Click a reflection area. Geoclimatic Parameters: You will find geoclimatic parameters defined for the studied microwave link: Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - - - Reflection area geometry: The Reflection area geometry part contains the following information: 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 2. 3. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab.99% of the average year in millimetre per hour. 7. i. The context menu appears. Coordinate System: The display coordinate system set in the . 4. The Report tab contains the following sections: Summary: The Summary part provides information on the impact of the reflection on the direct signal. Ground Type: It can be either scattering. Relative Humidity: The relative humidity in %.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report Atoll provides detailed analysis of reflection areas and their impact on microwave links. Rainfall Rate (exceeded during 0. Total Reflection Area Length: The length of the selected reflection zone and the total length including all reflection zones into brackets. Atoll recommends some solutions to minimise the reflection effects such as changing the receiver antenna tilt or implementing diversity techniques. Angle at A between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site A. In addition. For more information on how the ground type is determined. Earth Curvature Factor (k): The k factor defined in the Profile tab.e. 7. "Water or very wet" is considered for wet terrains. see the Technical Reference Guide.01% of the average year): The rainfall observed 99. "Slightly wet or moderatly dry" is used for rural open.2. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu.atl document. Height: The site altitude. Terrain Roughness Factor: The terrain roughness factor. Right-click the Profile tab. Geoclimatic factor (K): The K factor which models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.6.

if the reflected signal is obstructed. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab.9% of time. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. you can select the following information: - - Calculation Parameters: Under Calculation Parameters. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Percentage of time when the refractivity gradient (<100m) is <-100N-units/km: The percentage of the average year where the refractivity gradient value of -100N-units/km is not exceeded. - Link Specifications: Under Link Specifications. Direct Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the direct signal at the receiver side. kavg and kmax). the support type and custom fields. Climatic Zone: The climatic zone as defined in the link properties. Diversity Frequency: The second channel frequency when diversity frequency is used. BBER) to be considered for the link. Permitivity: The terrain permitivity. Sites: Sites related parameters such as the pylon height. Terrain Irregularity: The terrain irregularity. Calculated Channel: The calculated channel. The value is calculated according to refractivity conditions defined for the link. Specular Reflection Factor: The specular reflection factor. BBER) to be considered for the link. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. The value is read in the Geoclimatic Parameters file. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. For information on configuring the channel to be studied.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Angle at B between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site B. <Field Selection>: Atoll recommends optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for three k factor values (kmin. Calculation Methods: The calculation methods used (propagation model. you select the corresponding check boxes: Summary: Under Summary. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Conductivity: The terrain conductivity in S/m.9%): the k factor value observed 99. <Field Selection>: The results listed after can be calculated for three k factor values (kmin. and if the reflected and direct signals arrive in phase. <Custom Fields>: The custom fields available in Links table. Equipment: The equipment parameters for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB). Refractivity Gradient: The refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface (in N-units/km) as defined in the link properties. ESR. Terrain Profile: The terrain profile. ESR. Effective Earth Curvature Factor (ke at 99. Quality Objectives: The quality objectives (SESR. you can select the following information: - - Geoclimatic Parameters: Under Geoclimatic Parameters. space diversity and frequency diversity). Fog: the fog intensity in %. you can select the following information: - Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 213 . kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. The signal attenuation is due to the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and refractivity (Attenuation due to refractivity). Antennas: Main. - - Additional results appear if. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. availability model. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. The signal is attenuated by the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and because it is reflected by the ground (Attenuation due to ground reflection). The value is defined in the link properties. Total Attenuation: The total attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. Rain Height (0°C isotherm): The height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. calculation on the diversity antenna. Maximum Possible Attenuation: The strongest attenuation experienced by the direct signal at the receiver side. when configuring the report as explained in "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. you can select the following information: - - Transmission: Under Transmission. Climatic Factor: The geoclimatic factor as defined in the link properties. kavg and kmax). quality model. Surface Reflection Coefficient: The surface reflection factor. diversity and back antenna properties for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB) and repeaters (SiteP and SiteQ). This is the sum of the attenuation due to antenna discrimination and the attenuation due to ground reflection. Environment Type: The terrain type as defined in the link properties. Atmospheric Pressure: The atmospheric pressure (hPa) as defined in the link properties. Availability Objectives: The availability objectives (SESR. Polarisation: The antenna polarisation. Attenuations: The Attenuations part contains the following results calculated for the k factor value defined in the Profile tab: Reflected Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. you can select the following information: Detailed Study: You can read if the specular reflection point is within the reflection area. Median Value of the k factor: the k factor value observed 50% of time.

a.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report You can configure the display parameters of the reflection analysis report to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. To display a result. Select the paragraph alignment by selecting Align Left. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. In addition. you can select the following information: - - Attenuations: Under Attenuations. Tau(kmax)-Tau(kmin): The difference between Tau calculated for kmax and Tau calculated for kmin. 2. Click OK. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214.2. Zone Location: The distances from Site A at which the reflection area starts and ends. you can select the following information: 7. Tau corresponds to the difference in path length between direct and reflected signals expressed in wavelength. To restore the initial style. clear its check box. The Report Configuration dialogue appears. The Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue appears. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. d. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. 7. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. For information on defining the kmin and kmax.6. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. a. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. If the difference is lower than 1. Under Analysis Mode. To define reflection analysis parameters: 1. 5. Centred. 3. or Align Right.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the reflection analysis. Click the AaBbYyZz button to change the font. 4. select its check box. Location of the specular reflection point: The distance of the specular reflection point from Site A. b. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. Reflection area geometry: Under Reflection area geometry. Click a style. To configure the reflection analysis report: 1. select the reflection area to be considered in the reflection analysis: 214 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . b. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. click the Reset button. Path difference (direct/reflected) (m): The difference in path length between direct and reflected signals. kavg and kmax). If the difference exceeds or equals 1. select the Reset button. 3. Click the Actions button and select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. Reflected path delay: The delay of the reflected path in ns. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Click the Style tab.2. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. kavg and kmax). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. d. c. Click the Actions button and select Configure Report. Click the Contents tab. To hide a result. Antenna heights above the reflection plan: The antenna heights at SiteA and SiteB above the reflection plan. 2.6. then there is at least one minimum that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity may be implemented depending on how well the signal is reflected and whether there is significant discrimination against surface reflections from one or both of the antennas.Atoll User Manual Divergence Factor: The divergence factor. then there is no minimum (destructive interference at the receiver side due to the reflected signal) that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity can be avoided. you can access and modify the global calculation parameters and the microwave link parameters. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. c.

Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. You can also display the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path as a function of: The k factor. for different k factor values (kmin. 6. kmax and the kavg) and transmission frequencies. select the range of k factor values: kmin Factor: the lowest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. 3. select the method to be used to calculate the indirect signal amplitude. 7. Atoll displays the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path (i. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with equivalent reflection coefficient. you can identify whether ground reflection is a problem for the link. 9. for different k factor values (kmin. The context menu appears. Atoll makes the reflection analysis on the selected reflection area. Click the Actions button and select Calculation Parameters. To access the global calculation parameters: 1. the attenuation of the reflected path compared to the direct path) as a function of the antenna height. 6. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. 2. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with linear regression on the area. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. Click a reflection area. 2. 7. the Standard Deviation method and the Interdecile Range method. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. kmax and the kavg) and receiver antenna heights. see the Technical Reference Guide. Right-click the Profile tab. Click the Actions button and select Link Properties. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. For more information on these calculation methods. You can also use it to optimise the height and frequency separations. For more information on these calculation methods. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Under Amplitude calculation of the indirect ray. To access the microwave link parameters: 1. For more information on these calculation methods. select the Take into account height variations of check box and define the corresponding height. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. Atoll takes into account all reflection areas along the profile in the reflection analysis. 2. select the method to be used to calculate terrain height irregularity. The transmission frequency. By default. Under Refractivity. 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 215 . effects of reflections can be minimized by carefully positioning the antenna heights as explained in "Studying Reflection" on page 210. Click OK. Under Effect due to tide level above sea water. 5. In this case.e. You can choose between the Root Mean Square method. Global Calculation on all reflection areas: If you select this option. Under Antenna heights above the reflection plan.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Calculation on the selected reflection area: If you select this option. select the method to be used to calculate antenna heights above the reflection plan. 5. Under Terrain Height Irregularity. or by using diversity techniques with the antenna/frequency separations recommended in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. To check the recommended antenna height and frequency separations: 1.3 Solutions Against Reflections At the end of the reflection analysis. kmax Factor: the highest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. for different receiver antenna heights and transmission frequencies.6. 4. 8. see the Technical Reference Guide. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. Atoll provides you with a tool you can use to check whether the recommended antenna height and frequency separations are valid over a range of k factor values. by using the antenna discrimination capabilities and tilting the receiver antenna as indicated in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. see the Technical Reference Guide.

5. Atoll 7. Main Frequency and Other Frequency. to be considered for the analysis. define the antenna height values. 9. then divide each plan into a high segment and a low segment. Under Graph Selection. Max Bound: The upper value on the horizontal axis. 9. Under k Factor Selection.120: Study of Reflection and Diversity – Attenuation Graph 7. to be considered for the analysis.e. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. The optimal separations calculated for the different k factor values are displayed. You can redo the analysis with these values. kavg and kmax. Click OK. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. 10. 8. Main Antenna and Other Height. The optimal separations for the different k factor values are displayed. define the transmission frequency values. Thus. kmin. the k factor value not exceeded 99% of the average year) and the keff factor at 50% (i.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. Under Vertical Axis.7 Planning Microwave Link Channels Planning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. or keep clear the Automatic Bound Calculation check box and define these values manually (Max Attenuation and Min Attenuation).separation) and the other height (main antenna height + separation) values. 4. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity frequency (main frequency + separation) and the other frequency values (main frequency + 2*separation). The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations. A logical approach is to define a number of specific frequency plans. 6. 2. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective. 11. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. 11. Click a reflection area. to be considered for the analysis. The context menu appears. either select the Automatic Bound Calculation check box in order to let Atoll automatically determine the upper and lower values of the vertical axis. 8. It is common experience that such modifications in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during the initial design of the same network. Right-click the Profile tab. Click OK. The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the most important objective. frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only for interference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network. you can select the following: Ordinate: Select what you want to display on the horizontal axis. They are automatically calculated by Atoll. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity antenna height (main antenna height . 3. Diversity Antenna. 10. Atoll displays the keff factor at 99% (i. each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies. Select the Display tab. Min Bound: The lower value on the horizontal axis. Select the Variable Definition tab. Diversity Frequency. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. For each new link created in any environment. For information. You can choose between the receiver antenna height. Under Receiver Antenna Height Selection. the median k factor value). To optimise the antenna height and frequency separations: 1.e. define the k factor values. select the graphs to be displayed and how you want to colour them. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations. 216 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the k factor and the transmission frequency. Under Transmission Frequency Selection. Under Horizontal Axis. there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. 7.

Once the site parities are displayed on the map. Right-click the Links folder. You can also hide the site parities using the context menu.2 Creating a Report on Site Parities Atoll enables you to create a report displaying site parities.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs. Select Interference. The Channel Distribution table contains the following information. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa.7. the following are explained: • • • • • "Checking Microwave Link Site Parities" on page 217. 6. 2. To create a report displaying site parities: 1. Atoll checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands. Choose an icon for the different cases. 9. Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities. 6. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 217 . Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities. 7. 3. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 5. "Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 218. 4. 3. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (in dpi). 2.1 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities You can verify the parity of sites either on the map or in a report. Right-click the Links folder. 4. ) ) 3. If the transmitter frequency is in the high block. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. When an assignment is made. 7. "Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search" on page 218. The context menu appears. 5. Select Interference > Channels Distribution per Site > Display on the Map from the context menu.. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. the following are explained: • • "Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 217 "Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 217. To perform a site parity check and display the results on the map: 1. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend. Once Atoll has finished checking site parities.e. Right-click the Links folder. Select Interference and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu. You can also open the Channel Distribution dialogue using the toolbar by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button.1. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments. with each pair having minimum separations. "Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser" on page 219.7. Atoll takes into consideration the sites of microwave links which are active. filtered (i. Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu.1. you can hide them by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button again. 2. In this section. To hide the site parities using the context menu: 1.7. 7. and which intersect the computation zone. In this section. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. "Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products" on page 220 7. results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table. 4. Click OK. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site.1 Checking Site Parities on the Map Atoll enables you to view the site parities on the map and thereby detect any possible parity conflicts. The context menu appears. that are selected by the current filter parameters). Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click OK to start the calculations. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 8. The context menu appears.

Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Click Search.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search The semi-automatic channel search tool in Atoll ranks channels according to a definable cost function enabling you to find the best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. To display all channel arrangements available for the selected frequency band: Click the Frequency Plans button and resize the Search Tool window by dragging the lower border of the window. Site: The name of the site. 7. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. Links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. Links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. Select Planning > Semi-automatic Search from the context menu. Select the MW Channel tab.e. Click the Conditions tab and define the following: Link Directions to Calculate: Select the check box of the directions of the link to be calculated (Site A Site B. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band. Longitude: The longitude of the site. 3. Select a Sub-band. If you only want the selected Channel to be displayed. 8. The Semi-Automatic Channel Search dialogue appears. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. Latitude: The latitude of the site. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box. 2. This channel search is performed according to the interference received or transmitted per channel. If you selected the Same Sub-band Only check box. see "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. select the Same Sub-band Only check box. links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue and all others are displayed in grey. Atoll gives the name of microwave links whose the site has a multiple parity. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green and all other links are displayed in grey. 9. links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. 218 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 7. Click View > Search Tool.7. Select a Frequency Band.e. 6. The context menu appears. For more information. Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only.7. 5. you can use the Search Tool to search for channels. The Search Tool allows you to view channel reuse on the map. 2.Site A. To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link: 1. links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. Define in which half-band (Lower or Upper) you want to search for the channel. If you only want the links with the selected frequency Sub-band to be considered. Site B .. Links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. Links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. All other links are displayed in grey.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse In Atoll. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. The Search Tool window appears. The Search Tool window provides you with the following options: To restore the initial microwave link colours: Click the Reset Display button in the window. Select a Channel. 7. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green. Links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue. 3. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band.. 4. select the Co-channel Only check box. To find a channel using the Search Tool: 1. or both). Parity: The parity of the site.

or a space. This implies that the best available channels. The context menu appears. Click Calculate to launch the calculations. The results window displays the list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. To open the spectrum analyser: 1. are the ones listed on top of the list. you can find the channels with least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links. For example. Select Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu.7. or vertical. always off or taken into consideration according to geometric correlation. in terms of the related costs. You can also enter a range of channels available. The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. The minimum threshold degradation. set the parameter to 3000%. the values must be separated with either a comma. The channels to be analysed: Select Use all the channels of the sub-band if all the channels can be allocated.121: The I Level on the Band tab . 7.121): Figure 7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 219 . entering 20-22 corresponds to entering 20 21and 22.Received Interference Levels Option Atoll calculates the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the microwave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. If only some channels of the frequency sub-band can be allocated. The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables Atoll to filter the interferers. This tool calculates and draws a graph representing the channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. only the peak value is displayed on the graph. use the slider to define the weight given to the interferer and victim channels. - The link polarisation to be considered in the calculation. If there are more than one interfering signals. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. It is then possible through this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by selecting the channels to assign and clicking the Commit button. Site A Half-Band: Select the frequency half-band to calculate (lower or upper) for the transmission site (the opposite half-band is assigned to the reception site). - 5. Whether automatic transmission power control on interfering signals is to be considered always on. 4. this is the percentage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. You can locate the channels on which there is the least or no interference and allocate these "free" channels where required. Under Channel Weightings. 2. Atoll calculates a cost for each channel and each defined polarisation (either horizontal. Note: Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the peak signal value.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Under Channels to Study: Frequency Sub-Band: Select the frequency sub-band from the list of available frequency sub-bands from to the frequency band of the microwave link being studied.4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser Atoll can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave link’s operating frequency band enabling you to allocate unused or less used channels where required. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered on the useful signal. Click the Parameters tab and define: The earth curvature factor (k factor). The red line shows the total noise level received on the interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel. You can enter or paste a list of channels. by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. or horizontal and vertical). In order to take into account all the potential interferers. The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites. select Restrict the list of potential channels and define the channels available. Through this graph. or a semi-colon.

Frequencies are represented by vertical lines and reported on the horizontal axis.). - - 220 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. i. Intermodulation occurs when the input to a non-linear system is composed of two or more frequencies. see “Global Parameters” on page 156.122): Figure 7. Non-linear systems generate harmonics. 3f1. 5f1.. 2. Received interference levels: Select the Received interference levels option in order to display channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. - - 7.Site A.A snapshot of the I Levels on the Band tab. . For information on global parameters.122: The I Level on the Band tab .Site B or Site B if you selected Site B . These new frequencies are called intermodulation products (IMPs). see “Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products” on page 220. Site A if you selected Site A . see “Global Parameters” on page 156.The studied site.The reception frequencies used by the site. Atoll can calculate third-order intermodulation products. Site A Site B or vice versa..e. For information on displaying the third-order intermodulation products.e. They are important because they fall within the vicinity of the original frequency components. 2f1. Intermodulations: Select the Intermodulations option in order to display third-order intermodulation products.. meaning that if the input of a non-linear system is a signal of a single frequency (e. i. For information on global parameters.5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products Intermodulation is caused by non-linear behaviour of the signal processing being used. Actions > Report: Click Actions and then select Report from the menu in order to display a detailed report on the calculated intermodulation products.The studied microwave link and the selected hop. i. The report contains the following information: .g..Site B or Site B if you selected Site B .e. The blue lines indicate the frequencies used for transmission. You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied. . The context menu appears. The signals of different frequencies are mixed together.Atoll User Manual You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied. etc. Only frequenies within the frequency band of the studied microwave link are represented.e.The third-order intermodulation products belonging to the studied frequency band. see “Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser” on page 219.e. forming additional signals at frequencies that are not. in general.7. 4f1. Site A if you selected Site A .The transmission frequencies used by the site. For information on displaying the received interference levels. . Select Planning and Intermodulation Products from the context menu. Atoll displays a tool tip when you place the mouse cursor on each vertical line. Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. green lines show the frequencies used for reception and red lines represent the third-order intermodulation products. at harmonic frequencies of either.Intermodulations Option Atoll shows the transmission and reception frequencies used by the studied site (i..Site A) and calculates the third-order intermodulation products for each transmission channel of the frequency half-band of the microwave link. . To calculate third-order intermodulation products: 1.. . Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters. f1). then the output is a signal which includes a number of integer multiples of the input frequency (i. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. and can therefore interfere with the desired behaviour. Site A Site B or vice versa. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.

Atoll also considers the adjacency of frequency bands. "Displaying Interference on the Map" on page 226. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. 2. If so. 7. "Managing Interference Calculation Validity" on page 226. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. capacity and modulation. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. Interference calculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any user-defined group of links. 2. However. Atoll calculates all the microwave links in the group that are active. In this section.e.. Otherwise.8. If so. 7. i. that are selected by the current filter parameters). see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). or modulation are not the same. Right-click on the Links folder. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. transmitter mask. Polarisation and equipment signatures. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. are the active and filtered microwave links whose transmitter – receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation zone and whose interfering transmitter – interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. and receiver mask graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs. The context menu appears. By default. If the equipment manufacturer. Atoll searches for potential interferers in the network operating in the same frequency band. and intersect the computation zone. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. capacity. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. 7. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment.1 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 221 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 222. For information on the computation zone. You can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius. Atoll uses it.8. "Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links" on page 225. among all microwave links in the network. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. you can change the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available on the Modules tab. When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link. filtered (i. Potential interferers. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating frequency band of the microwave link being studied.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab.1. IRFs defined on the IRF table if available T/I curve.1 Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. In this section. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 221 . Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. The following parameters are taken into account when calculating interference: • • • • • Interferer ATPC can be user-defined as always on. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. Co-channel and adjacent channel interference. received interferer signal threshold and geo-climatic correlation factor between links.8 Analysing Interference Atoll includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommendations. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. "Using IRF in Interference Calculations" on page 224.. or the theoretical graphs if not. "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224. the interference in Atoll are calculated according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations.e. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table.

Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 7. Click OK. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. 7.123). Figure 7. 6. 4.124: IRF record Properties dialogue 8. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 7.123).1. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.Atoll User Manual 4. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. The context menu appears.124).8. 222 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 7. Right-click on the Links folder. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. Figure 7. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3.2 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). 9.123: IRF table 5. 2.

The context menu appears. b. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. A dialogue appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 223 . Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. d. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. 7. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. c. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a.125: IRF Setting dialogue 5. delete an IRF graph. Click OK. b. b. 6. 8. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. Select Delete from the context menu. Select Add Record from the context menu. The context menu appears. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Under Enter graph values. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). You can now define an IRF graph. The context menu appears.

quality model. thermal fade margin. capacities and configurations.Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. 2. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). In this case. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to calculate the IRF graph. port connection losses. length. port connection losses and waveguides and cable losses. shielding losses. worst month quality. It proceeds as follows: 1. 7. and waveguides and cable losses. it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation. . shared losses. site names.reception equipment pair in the IRF table. gains and diameters. shielding losses. thermal noise thresholds.Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. Under Reception Filter. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. capacity and modulation. d. connection losses. azimuths. average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. the port circulator and attenuator losses. minimal channel bandwidths.Summary: A summary of the link being studied. transmitter powers. Atoll first checks if an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment . Under Transmitter Filter. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. or the theoretical graphs if not. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. temperature. heights. the polarisation. A dialogue containing details of the interference analysis appears. ATPC effects. heights. digital hierarchy employed.2 Using IRF in Interference Calculations As explained in "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. rain intensity (exceeding 0. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antennas details such as the models. To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link: 1. locations. a global link estimation taking into account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year. The results are displayed in the following tabs: Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interference over any given microwave link. data rates. You can easily define the parameters for studying each microwave link. Atoll uses T/I curves in order to calculate the IRF graph. the transmission and reception port numbers. earth curvature factor (k). e. Else. shared losses. and altitudes for both extremities.Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. . tilts.Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. . and view the interference connections between the microwave link extremities being studied and their interferers and victims respectively. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. the corresponding frequency. PL percentage. The context menu appears. passive repeater gains (if any). its operating frequency band. total losses comprising filter losses. 9. capacity or modulation are not the same. Finally. f. availability model.8. water vapour density. If defined. g. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising of filter losses.Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model.3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link Atoll enables you to carry out interference studies on any microwave link of the network. repeaters (if any). Click OK. connection losses. 224 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. polarisation at both sites. it uses it.Atoll User Manual c. Select Planning >Interference Details from the context menu. the IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the interference calculation. visualise the results in the form of reports and tables. If the equipment manufacturer. azimuths. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. antennas used at both sites with their respective models. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. overflow thresholds. .Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. tilts. The report includes the following information: . Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment. the channel. gains.01% of time). whether it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. 7. . It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer.8. climatic factor. diameters and near fields. or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not. 2. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. . and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). modulation used.

for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. and availability objectives (SESR. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both directions. select the fields that you want to display in the report. antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. interfered useful bandwidth) and results of interference calculations over the microwave link (threshold degradation. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. if space and frequency diversities are used. fadings due to discrimination reduction. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. ESR (required). select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. space diversity and frequency diversity). These results include availability of hot standby. correlation area. To define the content of the interference report: 1. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field.8. Right-click the Links folder. the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. enhancement forecast). pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. total interference in clear-air. ESR (required). To select a field to be included in the report. for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. ESR. In this section. "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is not considered in the total attenuation).4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate interference for a group of microwave links simultaneously or over the entire network of microwave links. the following are explained: • • "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207. Select Interference > Properties from the context menu. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). 4. Interference Details: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied and the microwave links interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. the outage probability. 7. losses due to water vapour. BBER (required)). Define the content of the report: a. Interference results are displayed in the form of a report whose the content you can define. Click Add. The context menu appears. threshold degradation for rain. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. quality objectives (SESR. the outage probability.8. Interference: Calculation parameters taken into consideration for the interference study (power control. - - - - - - - Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. minimum threshold degradation. you can define the content of the interference report. details for the average year (rain fading. BBER (required)). outage probability due to failures for the average year. BBER). Unavailability due to failures: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. selective fading. free space loss. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. losses due to dry air. total interference in rain and C/I). The Field Selection dialogue appears. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management interference.4. These results include the outage probability. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). nominal received carrier power level. 7. The Properties dialogue appears. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. b. 2. maximum distance. diffraction losses. fading due to discrimination reduction). In the Field Selection dialogue. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. whether enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. ESR. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 225 . To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. from top to bottom. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. BBER).1 Defining the Content of the Interference Report Before calculating interference on multiple microwave links. Propagation: The nominal received signal level. 3. These results include the outage probability. rain attenuation. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. To change the order of the fields.

and recalculates interference. You can view details of each microwave link. Atoll removes existing calculations. are saved in the Atoll document. Right-click the Links folder. Click the microwave link on the map. Notes: • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. by double-clicking the record in the report. b. 2. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to recalculate interference. 2. For the first two reasons. 7. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. 5. 7.4. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity Interference calculations. In the last case (e. If geographic data maps have been updated. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. To recalculate interference for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder.8. including valid ones. You can also perform interference analysis over the entire network of microwave links. The context menu appears. 3. Select Interference > Calculate from the context menu. © Forsk 2010 226 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited . The context menu appears.. The details are displayed in a detailed interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224. Click OK. To force Atoll to recalculate interference: 1. Atoll removes existing calculations. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. The next time you configure an interference report. You can also reset existing calculations and not recalculate interference afterwards by selecting the Interference > Reinitialise. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. If microwave link properties have been modified. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder. including valid ones. To recalculate interference for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. you can display the result on the map. 2. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double-clicking the corresponding record in the Victim/Interferer tabs. The context menu appears. Atoll displays the interference report. you must force Atoll to recalculate. Atoll automatically detects the calculation invalidity when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a group of links. 1. So.g.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links You can Atoll to calculate interference levels for a group of microwave links. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. To display interference connections on the map 1. Select Interference > Force Calculations from the context menu.Atoll User Manual c. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. once calculations have been performed for all the links. 7.8. if you added a new clutter class map).8. 3. Click the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) in the toolbar.6 Displaying Interference on the Map After calculating interference on a microwave link. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. performed on a group of microwave links.

Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and select if you want to make them visible. The pointer changes to ( ). You can create a point-to-multipoint link in several different ways: • • • using the mouse. When the interference connections are displayed on the map. 4. transmitters. The Interference dialogue opens. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link. To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder: 1. and passive repeaters. Once you have selected a frequency band. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears. you can use the tool tip to show further information about each interference connection by placing the cursor on it. 4. or editing the point-to-multipoint links table. Atoll displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards and outwards pointing arrows respectively. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link In Atoll. 4. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwave links must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active" on page 229. Atoll creates a new site where you click. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse: 1. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub" on page 230. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. "Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally" on page 229. You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map.9. You can hide them by clicking the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) again. Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 227 . 3.1. 5. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. "Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. The context menu appears. Click the map at each place you want to insert a new link. created automatically at the location you clicked on the map. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. In this section. 3. Select New from the context menu. The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites. 2. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ). Click the New PMP button ( ) on the toolbar. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.1 Advanced Configuration Point-to-Multipoint Links A point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub. using the point-to-multipoint link folder.9 7. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. If you do not click an existing site. 2. 1. a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which can contain repeaters) connected to a hub. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. 3. 2. but can be modified. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neither interfering with the link nor being interfered by it. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse" on page 231 7. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 229. "Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230.9. 7. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • "Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 227. "Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties" on page 228. The context menu appears. Right-click on the Links folder.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed on the map.

enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Frequency Band. 7. 7. b. the following are explained: • • "Modifying Global Properties" on page 228 "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 228.9. see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. A global setting is applied to all the filtered point-to-multipoint links. The context menu appears. 4. 5.1 Modifying Global Properties To manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally: 1. 5. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 228 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . In this section. The Point to Multipoint table appears.1. Click the c. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit. labels on the map. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears. including user-defined fields. 2. Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link. to manage the legend.1. see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230 To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint table: 1. and Site. Once you have selected the hub site.2 Modifying Individual Properties To edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Select Open Table from the context menu. The following fields must be filled: Name. The context menu appears. of the point-to-multipoint table. 6. where "X" increments with the creation of each new point-to-multipoint link. Atoll names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX". Atoll creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 4. 6. 3. Click OK. and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool 6. Click OK.9. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens. Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link: On the Data tab of the Explorer window: a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. sort. The context menu appears. d. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ). To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. By default. ). button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. and filter tools. Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their attributes. Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents. 7.2. 3. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.2.Atoll User Manual Nodal Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. 2. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( Type: Select the type: TDMA or FDMA.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties You can modify point-to-multipoint link properties either individually or globally.1.9. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Properties from the context menu. You can also organise point-to-multipoint links by using Atoll’s group. . To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder.

4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally To map microwave links to point-to-multipoint links globally: 1. The point-tomultipoint icon changes ( Note: ). b. Select the Links tab. In this table. 7. 2. 2. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. 3.1. The context menu appears. select a link. For information on creating links. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management On the map: a. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change. In the row with the new row icon ( ). delete. edit. 4. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. An Other Properties tab is available if you have added fields to the Point-to-Multipoint table.1.9. Click the Expand button ( 3. Right-click the new point-to-multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu. ) to expand the Point to Multipoint folder. Do not select the site icon ( ). The context menu appears. 5. Links: The Links tab lets you add. The context menu appears. Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on the map.9. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. 7. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link: 1. 5. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. containing all the pointto-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links. Select one of the following: Activate Links: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link active. In the Explorer window. The Properties dialogue appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). You can also organise multi-hops by using Atoll’s group. and filter tools. 2. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. you can modify. 4. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Deactivate Links: Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link inactive. Select Properties from the context menu. and add the links that make up a point-to-multipoint link. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder. sort. 3.9. 6. Click OK. 7. Right-click the PMP hub whose activity status you want to set. The PMP/Link Mapping table opens. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 229 . and delete microwave links.1. 7.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a point-to-multipoint link. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub. 2.

1. Select Delete from the context menu. The context menu appears. Select Add a Link from the context menu. d.1. The context menu appears. the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. 7. Click the Expand button ( 3. The pointer shape changes ( ). On the map. Note: Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters related to that site. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. For information on creating links.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub When a microwave link consists of only two sites. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. after the point-to-multipoint has been created. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link. 6. Click the Expand button ( 3. Atoll can recalculate the settings for the point-tomultipoint hub antenna. On the map. When selecting a point-to-multipoint link. The microwave link is deleted. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted. select the microwave link you want to delete. In a pointto-multipoint link.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a point-to-multipoint link: 1. 2. the height. On the map. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse: 1. 2. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. Or a. Click the Expand button ( c.1. The context menu appears. b. 4. 230 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .1. 4.9. 2. You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Point-to-Multipoint table. The context menu appears. 5. it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder.9. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete: Either a. Atoll calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. Select Delete from the context menu. be careful to select the line representing the point-to-multipoint link. The context menu appears. 7. Consequently.9. However.Atoll User Manual 7. Do not select the site icon ( ). 7. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link. Deleting a point-to-multipoint link from the table does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link. azimuth. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link: 1. To make Atoll recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1.9. click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. other factors such as the addition of new microwave links may mean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. b. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site.

7. ) and you can © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 231 . When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated. 6. The Properties dialogue appears. 2. In the "Antenna" subsection.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 5. 8. 7. the point-to-multipoint link antennas may need to be adjusted accordingly. A dialogue appears with the recalculated height. 9. and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse To use the mouse to adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. Click the antenna icon (the point changes: ) and rotate it to its new azimuth. Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas. If you want Atoll calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hub antenna on the link antennas. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( now rotate it manually. azimuth. select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. Select Properties from the context menu.1. click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field.9.

Atoll User Manual 232 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

132 changing relative position on the map 20 compatibility with equipment (MW) 138. editing (MW) 125 archiving all modifications to the database 87 only site data to the database 87 automatic backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 availability objectives microwave links. calculating for 204 C cables creating (MW) 137 microwave 137 channel search. adjusting with the mouse 231 single antenna patterns. semi-automatic (MW) 218 clearance. copying (MW) 126 antenna patterns. 139 compatibility with equipment. defining 33 report. importing (MW) 125. adjusting (MW) 200 heights. adjusting automatically (MW) 200 heights. creating 123 point-to-multipoint link.Index Index A antenna antenna patterns. searching by 73 coverage prediction exporting results 37 geogrphic export zone. adjusting 230 point-to-multipoint link. 225 single microwave link. displaying for microwave links 194 column headers formatting 45 columns changing width 45 displaying 46 freezing 46 hiding 46 moving 46 © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 233 . examples 64 formatting column headers 45 formatting table columns 45 freezing columns 46 hiding columns 46 importing data 50 moving columns 46 opening 41 opening record properties from table 44 pasting data 47 printing 52 restoring after filtering 64 sorting 60 B backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 BER graphs creating (MW) 136 budget configuring report (MW) 206 multiple microwave links. displaying using hot spot zone 31 coverage predictions restricting sites studied (MW) 192 cursors 40 CW Measurement Analysis Tool printing data 56 D Data tab 15 data tables adding a field 42 changing column width 45 changing row height 45 copying data 47 deleting a field 43 displaying columns 46 editing 43 exporting data 49 filtering 60 filtering by selection 62 filtering by several criteria 63 filtering. 140 heights. defining 156 unfreezing 46 computation zone drawing 30 editing 34 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. creating from 30 Connection Properties 85 context menu 17 renaming objects 17 coordinate system 81 setting 82 coordinates. printing (MW) 126 antennas. assistant (MW) 139. calculating for 206. displaying using focus zone 31 report. optimising (MW) 200 microwave 123 microwave antenna properties 125 microwave.

84 creating from template 79. using for 69 filtering data tables by selection 62 H hot spot zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 234 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . exporting to 51 XML files. discrete values 22 display type. unique 22 display type. 140 importing (MW) 132 transceiver. assistant (MW) 139. 80 geographic data 79 information needed to create 79 microwave data 79 microwave equipment 79 refreshing from the database 86 setting basic parameters 81 document templates. 71 with subfolders 71 filtering zone deleting 33 drawing 29 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. properties of (MW) 131 Explorer window 15 Data tab 15 Geo tab 15 layers 16 Modules tab 15 using tabs 15 G Geo tab 15 geographic export zone creating 33 Fit to Map Window 34 importing 34 polygon. importing from 52 database archiving all modifications 87 archiving only site data 87 connecting to 84 Connection Properties 85 creating a document from 84 refreshing document 86 resolving data conflicts 88 working with 83 digital hierarchy 132 display changing properties 21 defining display type 22 display type. creating from 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 folder configuration 69 applying a saved configuration 70 creating 70 deleting 71 exporting 70 importing 70 reapplying current configuration 70 frequency bands long-haul (MW) 145 medium-haul (MW) 146 microwave 146 short-haul (MW) 146 frequency planning (MW) 216 frequency sub-bands microwave 147 E equipment compatibility with antennas (MW) 138.Atoll User Manual sorting by one column 61 sorting by several columns 61 unfreezing columns 46 viewing properties 42 XML files. creating from 34 grouping 56 by a property 56. value intervals 22 display coordinate system 81 Distance Measurement tool 28 document creating from database 79. see "templates" DTM maps representing different areas 111 data tables by several criteria 63 examples 64 restoring after filtering 64 using a polygon 29. creating from 30 Find toolbar 72 focus zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 polygon. 57 by several properties 58 examples 59 with subfolders 71 F field adding to a table 42 deleting from a table 43 filter site list. 139 compatibility with antennas. using for 69 transmitter list.

setting as active 206 simple links 185 single antenna patterns. adjusting automatically 200 antenna heights.Index I interference analysis several links (MW) 226 single link (MW) 224 interference analysis (MW) 221 interference reduction factor table (MW) 134. configuring report 206 cables 137 cables. 178. point-to-multipoint. defining 155 reliability analysis 203 required margins. setting 82 measuring distances on the map 28 medium-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 microwave error performance events 155 microwave error performance objectives 155 microwave error performance parameters 155 Microwave Link Analysis printing 56 Microwave Link toolbar 75 microwave links 173 antenna heights. 139 antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 139. mapping simple links to 210 multi-hop. 221 IRF. 214 classes. copying 126 antenna patterns. 179 microwave ITU-R P. creating 154 classes. see "interference reduction factor" L label 23 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 layers 16 legend adding object type 24 displaying 24 displaying Legend window 29 printing Legend window 56 line of sight area intersection of areas (MW) 184 studying (MW) 176. modifying 154 clearance. 221 LOS between sites. 139. 178. adjusting 200 antenna heights. 140 interference reduction factor (MW) 133. calculating 204 restricting sites studied 192 semi-automatic channel search 218 simple link. see point-to-multipoint links Location Finder searching by coordinates 73 searching by text property 73 long-haul frequency bands (MW) 145 M manufacturers (MW) 123 map centring on a selected object 28 exporting as image 40 measuring distances 28 moving 27 printing 52 refreshing display 72 saving as image 39 Map toolbar 74 measurement units. mapping links to 229 profile analysis 193 quality objectives. 132 availability objectives. 225 budget. creating 137 calculation parameters 156 calculation parameters. optimising 200 antenna patterns. 221 using assistant (MW) 135. 140 antennas 123 antennas. 179 line of sight area (MW) 176 lines editing 34 link. printing 126 © Forsk 2010 antenna properties 125 antenna/equipment compatibility 138. importing 125. inserting (MW) 203 performance objectives 154 point-to-multipoint link 227 point-to-multipoint links. creating 208 passive repeater 201 passive repeater. displaying on the map 217 sorting by site 58 spectrum analyser 219 studying LOS between sites 176 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 235 . displaying 194 equipment. intersection 184 LOS between sites. defining 156 budget. analysing 224 interference on several links. defining 156 grouping by site 58 interference analysis 221 interference on a single link. creating 190 simple link. modifying 205. analysing 226 interference reduction factor 133. creating a report on 217 site parity. editing 125 site parity 217 site parity. calculating for multiple links 206. importing 132 error performance events 155 error performance objectives 155 error performance parameters 155 finding by site 58 frequency bands 146 frequency planning 216 frequency sub-bands 147 global properties. calculating for single link 204 budget. studying 176.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 multi-hop links. creating 123 antennas.

modifying 191 template. using as 34 printing zone. see "printing" Panoramic window 14. mapping to 229 properties 228 polygon deleting polygon filter 33 drawing a polygon filter 29 editing 34 focus zone. properties of 131 trunk types. deleting 191 transceiver equipment. adjusting 230 antenna. deleting 191 template field. using as 31 geographic export zone. defining parameters 151. creating 137 workflow 173 Microwave Propagation Model defining parameters 151. 57 switching between property dialogues 18 236 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 71 using as filtering zone 30 printing antenna patterns (MW) 126 CW Measurement Analysis Tool 56 data tables and reports 52 defining print layout 54 docking windows 56 Legend window 56 map 52 Microwave Link Analysis 56 Point Analysis window 56 print preview 55 profile analysis (MW) 195 recommendations 53 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 56 printing zone drawing 53 Fit to Map Window 54 importing 54 polygon. creating 132 waveguides 137 waveguides. 57 grouping by several properties 58 grouping. examples 59 hiding 16 label 23 tip text 24 visibility scale 23 P Page Setup. creating from 54 profile analysis microwave 193 options (MW) 194 printing (MW) 195 reflections. adding on the map 230 links. adding 191 template field. adjusting with the mouse 231 creating 227 deleting 230 deleting a link from 230 global properties 228 links. see point-to-multipoint link multi-user environment 83 O objects changing transparency 23 deleting 17 displaying 16 displaying properties 18 grouping 56 grouping by a property 56. using as 54 using as computation zone 30 using as filter 29. 230 creating 227 mapping links 229 properties 228 point-to-multipoint links 227 adding links 229 antenna. 27 passive microwave repeaters creating 202 performance objectives microwave links 154 Point Analysis window printing 56 points editing 34 point-to-multipoint link adding a link 229. mapping to 210 reliability analysis 210 multipoint link. studying (MW) 210 Values tab (MW) 196 viewing (MW) 193 profile values exporting data 199 importing data 199 projection coordinate system 81 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 propagation model microwave ITU-R P.Atoll User Manual template field. 153 microwave radio links template 79 Modules tab 15 multi-hop links 208 adding links to 209 creating 208 links.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 Microwave Propagation Model. 153 properties changing display 21 grouping objects by 56.

using as 69 site parity. choosing 27 Search toolbar 75 searching for map objects 72. modifying (MW) 191 microwave radio links 79 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool printing 56 tip text 24 tool tips. 73 short-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 site moving on the map 19 moving to a higher location 19 properties. adding (MW) 191 field. defining 155 T table columns formatting 45 tables. see "tip text" toolbar icons 74 Map 74 Microwave Link 75 Search 75 Standard 74 Vector Edition 75 transceiver equipment properties of (MW) 131 transmitter list 67 adding 68 adding transmitter 68 creating 68 editing 69 editing filter 69 transparency. inserting (MW) 203 reports printing 52 required margins. microwave creating 137 waveguides. accessing from the Explorer window 18 properties. changing 23 trunk types.Index Q quality objectives microwave links. microwave creating 132 R redo 72 reflection analysis report display (MW) 214 reflections studying (MW) 210 refresh 72 from the database 86 reliability analysis (MW) 203 renaming 17 default object names 17 repeaters passive repeater (MW) 201 passive repeater. microwave 137 windows cascading 14 docking 14 floating 14 X XML © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 237 . see "data tables" templates 79 deleting (MW) 191 field. microwave link 217 creating a report 217 displaying on the map 217 sorting sorting tables by one column 61 sorting tables by several columns 61 with subfolders 71 spectrum analyser (MW) 219 Standard toolbar 74 station template creating (MW) 191 modifying (MW) 191 subfolders creating 71 U undo 72 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 user configuration 66 creating 67 exporting 67 importing 67 V Vector Edition toolbar 75 visibility scale 23 W waveguides creating (MW) 137 waveguides and cables. calculating (MW) 204 row height changing 45 rulers displaying 28 S scale level. accessing from the map 18 site list 67 adding 68 adding site 68 creating 68 editing 69 filter. deleting (MW) 191 field.

Atoll User Manual exporting data tables to 51 importing data tables from 52 Z zooming choosing a scale 27 in on a specific area 27 238 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 239 .

P. West Tower. IL 60606 .Suite 3100 Chicago.com . Jiadu Commercial Building. 66 Jianzhong Road. Guangzhou. 3/F. of China Tel: +86 20 8553 8938 Fax: +86 20 8553 8285 www. No. 510665. R.3 AT283_UMM_E2 December 2010  Head Office 7. rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac .8.forsk.France Tel: +33 562 747 210 Fax: +33 562 747 211  US Office 200 South Wacker Drive . Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone.USA Tel: +1 312 674 4846 Fax: +1 312 674 4847  China Office Suite 302.User Manual Microwave Links version 2.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful